JP7386561B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, and is particularly applicable to pachinko gaming machines and the like.

Some conventional game machines perform a jackpot game in which a jackpot is determined based on a ball entering a starting hole with a predetermined jackpot probability, and a jackpot is opened when the result of the jackpot is determined as a jackpot. Some gaming machines have a probability setting function that changes the jackpot probability when a gaming clerk or the like performs a predetermined operation on the gaming machine (for example, Patent Document 1).

Conventional gaming machines also have a so-called backup function, which retains the gaming state when power supply is cut off and restores the gaming state based on the stored memory when power is supplied again. There were some that had

JP 10-57583

When a probability setting function is installed in a gaming machine having a backup function as described above, depending on how these functions are used, there is a risk that fraud may occur or a fair gaming machine may not be provided.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a fair and efficient gaming machine by setting a predetermined limit in a gaming machine equipped with a determination probability setting function.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is as follows:
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
special game execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a particular manner and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific result;
a determination probability storage means for storing a determination probability that the determination means determines a specific result;
A mode that has an insertion part into which a setting key can be inserted and removed, and in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion part and the setting key is operated to operate the insertion part between an OFF position and an ON position. A setting lock,
position determination means capable of determining whether the insertion portion is in the OFF position or the ON position;
a setting state in which a judgment probability can be set at least on condition that the insertion portion is operated to the ON position, and a judgment probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined judgment probability as a judgment probability of the judgment means in the setting state; ,
a power supply means for supplying power;
gaming information storage means for storing gaming information including a determination result by the determining means;
Setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means;
a first memory storage means capable of storing and retaining game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
a second memory storage means capable of storing and retaining the setting information stored in the setting probability storage means for a predetermined period even after the power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage;
gaming information recovery means capable of restoring gaming information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming information stored and held by the first memory holding means when the power supplying means starts supplying power;
gaming information initialization means for erasing the gaming information stored and held by the first storage holding means when the power supplying means starts supplying power and not restoring the gaming information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; Equipped with
When the game information initialization means erases the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means, the game information initialization means can shift to the setting state,
When the game information recovery means restores the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means, it is impossible to shift to the setting state,
When the game information held by the first memory holding means is erased and the setting state is not changed to the setting state , when the setting information held by the second memory holding means is predetermined normal information; , the game information stored and held by the first storage storage means is erased, and the game is started based on the determination probability of the determination means based on the setting information stored and held by the second storage storage means,
In the case where the game information held by the first memory holding means is deleted and the setting state is not changed to the setting state, if the setting information held by the second memory holding means is not predetermined normal information, making it impossible to start the game,
When the power supply means starts supplying power, if the setting key is placed in the OFF position with no setting information stored in the setting probability storage means, the game cannot be started. It is assumed that
a display screen that displays a setting notification to notify that the judgment probability of the judgment means has been set by the judgment probability setting means;
A movable decorative member that operates in accordance with the game production,
When power supply is started, an initial operation is performed to notify the setting and to confirm the operation of the movable decorative member,
After the setting notification has been executed for a predetermined period of time, the initial operation of the movable decorative member is performed in such a manner that the movable decorative member passes through a position overlapping the display screen.
It is characterized by this.

According to such a gaming machine, a predetermined determination probability can be set as the determination probability of the determining means by inputting a setting key. Further, the set probability storage means stores setting information indicating the set determination probability, the game information storage means stores game information including the determination result by the determination means, and the game information storage means stores the game information even after the power supply is stopped. 1 memory holding means, a second memory holding means for storing and holding the setting information even after the power supply is stopped, a game information recovery means for restoring the game information held in memory, and a game information initialization unit for erasing the game information held in memory. It is equipped with a means of conversion.

Then, erasing the game information stored and retained by the game information initialization means is a condition for transitioning to a setting state in which the determination probability can be set, and if the stored game information is not deleted, the determination probability is set. It is impossible to move to a setting state where it is possible. In addition, if the stored gaming information is deleted and the setting state is not changed to a setting state in which the determination probability can be set, if the setting information stored in the second storage storage means is normal (that is, if there is no abnormality), ), the game information is initialized, the determination probability is set based on the stored setting information, and the game is started.

As a result, in order to set the determination probability in the setting state, it is necessary to initialize the game information, and it is possible to set the game state at the start of the game when the determination probability is set to the initial state. Become. This makes it possible to provide fair games. In addition, when the gaming information is initialized and the setting state does not change, if there is no abnormality in the stored setting information, the game can be started by setting the determination probability based on the stored setting information. Allows you to start. This eliminates the need for a second determination probability setting operation when initializing game information, making it possible to efficiently set the gaming machine. In addition, if there is an abnormality in the setting information, it is possible to ensure that the game is disabled before the game starts without setting a determination probability, and prevent unexpected disadvantages to the game parlor and the player. It becomes possible to do so.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a fair and efficient gaming machine by setting a predetermined limit on the setting conditions of the determination probability setting function.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a back view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view showing the configuration of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is a diagram showing displays included in the gaming machine. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a power supply board, etc. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big prize opening. (A) is a table showing random numbers regarding special symbols acquired by the game control microcomputer, (B) is a table showing random numbers regarding normal symbols acquired by the game control microcomputer, and (C) is a reach determination table. Yes, (D) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a table showing a jackpot determination table for each game mode. It is a table showing the jackpot probability etc. for each game mode. It is a table showing a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of initial setting processing. It is a flowchart of mode setting processing. It is a flowchart of mode confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of a power-on notification process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of base display processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of normal figure movement processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of normal electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of special figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 propriety judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game). It is a flowchart of specific area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting pitch entry. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of mode setting monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. It is a flowchart of initial processing. It is a flowchart of a process when a setting is not changed. It is a timing chart in initial processing. It is a figure which shows the initial operation of setting notification and panel movement. 12 is a flowchart of initial processing according to another aspect 1. 12 is a flowchart of initial processing according to another aspect 2. 7 is a timing chart of initial processing in another embodiment. 7 is a flowchart of mode setting processing according to the second embodiment. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a power supply board, etc. of Example 3; 12 is a flowchart of mode setting processing according to the third embodiment. 12 is a flowchart of mode setting processing according to the third embodiment. 12 is a flowchart of power-on notification processing according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a power supply board, etc. of Example 5. 12 is a flowchart of main control main processing according to the fifth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart of mode setting processing according to the fifth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart of setting storage unit determination processing according to the fifth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart of base storage unit determination processing according to the fifth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a back view of a gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the composition of the game board of Example 6. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the gaming machine frame of Example 6 in an open state. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a second confirmation display section of Example 6. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of another aspect of the second confirmation display section of the sixth embodiment.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In addition, in the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuating display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine is capable of executing a winning game that can award a predetermined amount of gaming profits (for example, prize balls) to the player. , an example to which the present invention is applied will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 attached within the game machine frame 50. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching the gaming board 2, etc., and an outer frame 53 for attaching (fixing) the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. The front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 (also referred to as "opening/closing frame") are pivotally supported at one end with respect to the outer frame 53, and are configured to be openable and closable, respectively.

In addition, the front frame 51 includes a firing handle 60 for firing the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of operation (rotation angle) of the player, and a firing handle 60 that can store game balls and supply the stored game balls to the firing device side. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61 are provided. The front frame 51 also includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively called (also simply referred to as a "performance button 63") is provided. The plurality of performance buttons can be selectively used depending on the type of game performance.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) and a speaker 67, and the movable decorative member 17 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66. The movable total decorative member 17 is driven to rotate (with the back side of the frame lamp 66 as the rotation axis) as the game performance progresses, and the frame lamp 66 lights up in a predetermined lighting manner. Further, this movable decorative member 17 operates when a game performance (performance symbol variation performance) with a relatively high possibility of winning a jackpot is executed. Further, the frame lamp 66 may indicate a high or low possibility of winning a jackpot depending on its lighting mode. The movable decorative member 17 also operates in a predetermined manner during a jackpot or during an initial operation described later. Note that the configuration of the production button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and may be any type that can detect an input from a player, or an input detection means (for example, , a retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or a non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body and performs an input. good. The game board 2 has a game area 3 surrounded by a rail member 4, into which game balls shot by operating a shooting handle 60 flow down. The game board 2 is also provided with a board lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are provided in the game area 3 in a protruding manner. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the firing device side.

Further, near the center of the gaming area 3, an image display device 7 made of a liquid crystal display device is provided. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with a performance pattern display area 7b (also referred to as a "performance pattern display section") in which performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as "performance pattern 8") are displayed. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, which will be described later. The effect pattern display area 7b consists of three pattern display areas, for example, "left," "middle," and "right." The left pattern display area displays the left pattern 8L, and the middle pattern display area displays the medium pattern. A symbol 8C is displayed, and a right production symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area.

In addition, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each consist of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The left, middle, and right performance symbols that are stopped and displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b are displayed on the first special symbol display 41a (also referred to as the "first special symbol display section"), which will be described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol and the result of the variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as "second special symbol display section") (that is, special symbol validity judgment (results of ``probability determination'') are displayed in a manner that is easy for players to recognize. Incidentally, any one of the first special symbol, second special symbol, and performance symbol may be simply referred to as a "design" or "identification information."

For example, if the result of the special symbol validity determination is a jackpot, it is possible to stop display the performance symbol with the same three digits such as "777" (also referred to as "win performance symbol"). In addition, in the case of a small hit, it is possible to stop displaying the production pattern with a preset chance pattern such as "135" or a special pattern such as "3★3" (also referred to as a "small hit production pattern"). It is. In addition, in the case of a miss, the production symbol can be stopped and displayed with a winning pattern (also referred to as a "missing effect design") in which at least one of the three symbols such as "637" or "373" is different. It is possible.

Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the performance symbols that are stopped and displayed. In other words, the player generally does not directly understand the result of the special symbol validity determination by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather The user sees and understands the performance symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b. It should be noted that the positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas do not need to be provided separately, and the display areas of the left, middle, and right production symbols may be used as the entire symbol display area (production symbol display area 7b). . In addition, examples of the manner in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner include, for example, a manner in which they are scrolled up and down, left and right, diagonally, and the like.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect using the above-mentioned effect symbols (effect pattern game effect), a winning game effect executed in conjunction with a winning game, and a display for waiting for customers. Demonstration performances etc. will be displayed. In addition, in the performance symbol game performance, winning game performance, and demonstration performance, in addition to performance symbols such as numbers, performance images other than performance symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed.

In addition, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first performance reservation display area 9c (first performance reservation display section) that displays a first performance reservation 9a according to the number of stored first special symbol reservations, which will be described later. , there is a second performance pending display area 9d (second performance pending display section) that displays a second performance pending 9b according to the number of stored second special figures pending, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first performance hold or the second performance hold, the number of stored first special figure holds and the second special figure displayed on the first special figure hold display 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later. The stored number of second special figures pending displayed on the figure pending display 43b can be clearly shown to the player.

Near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7, a center decoration 10 is provided so as to surround the performance symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the lower part of the center decoration body 10. Further, a hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decoration body 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, and receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit, and guides it to the stage section 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage part 11 can enter the first starting port 20, which will be described later, with a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage part 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13 having an illumination member (board lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on depending on the game state, and which is shaped like letters, figures, etc., is arranged. There is.

Further, at the upper part of the center decoration body 10 and behind the decoration member 13, there is provided a movable decoration member 14 that can be operated in accordance with the game performance. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, when a game performance with a relatively high probability of winning is executed, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward, and the movable decorative member 14 is The decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, making most of it visible.

This increases the player's expectation of winning. Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 is provided which includes a non-variable first starting port 20 that does not change the ease with which game balls enter the game ball. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number etc. for special symbol validity determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, the validity determination regarding the first special symbol (first special symbol validity determination) is obtained. Judgment) is executed, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the judgment.

Below the first starting port 20, a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a "variable starting port") is provided which includes a variable second starting port 21 that changes the ease with which game balls enter. . Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number etc. for special symbol validity determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, the validity determination of the second special symbol (second special symbol validity determination) is obtained. ) is executed, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the validity determination. The variable prize winning device 22 includes a movable member 23, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by operating the movable member 23.

Through this opening/closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which there is a higher possibility of a game ball entering than the first mode. be. The movable member 23 is driven by a second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, a game ball can enter the second starting port 21 only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and a game ball cannot enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when it is in the open state, the second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

On the right side of the first starting opening 20 in the gaming area 3, a first big winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entrance") including a first big winning opening 30 is provided. The first big winning device 31 includes an opening/closing member 32, and opens and closes the first big winning opening 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first large prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first variable ball entry opening 31 can be switched between a ball entry disabled state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which a game ball can enter, by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 32. It can be changed to

In addition, above the first big prize opening 30 in the gaming area 3 and at the lower right of the center decoration body 10, a second big prize winning device 36 (“second variable ball entrance”) equipped with a second big winning opening 35 is provided. ) is provided. The second big winning device 36 includes an opening/closing member (wing member) 37, and opens and closes the second big winning opening 35 by operating the opening/closing member 37. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second large prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second variable ball entry opening 36 can be switched between a ball entry disabled state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which a game ball can enter, by the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing member 37. It can be changed to

In addition, the second grand prize device 36 specifies a specific area 39 and a non-specific region 49 through which the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 35 can pass, and a gaming ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 35. It is configured to include a movable piece 150 for guiding (distributing) to the area 39 or the non-specific area 49. The movable piece 150 is driven by a movable piece solenoid 151 (see FIG. 5), and the movable piece 150 is triggered by the opening of the second big prize opening 35, in other words, the start of the opening operation of the opening/closing member 37. The operation begins. When the movable piece solenoid 151 is OFF, that is, when the movable piece 150 is not operating (non-operating state), the game ball that enters the second grand prize opening 35 is guided to the non-specific area 49, and then to the specific area. It becomes impossible to pass through 39.

On the other hand, when the movable piece solenoid 151 is ON, that is, when the movable piece 150 is operating (operating state), the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 35 is guided to the specific area 39, It becomes possible to pass through 39. In this pachinko game machine 1, a high probability state described below is generated based on the detection that at least one of the game balls that entered the second grand prize opening 35 has passed through the specific area 39. . In other words, the specific area 39 serves as a variable probability operation opening. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first big prize winning device 31.

A gate 28 (game ball passage opening) through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3. Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining the validity of the normal symbol is obtained, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a normal control is performed to determine whether or not to open the second starting port 21. As the pattern validity determination is executed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol validity determination. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 becomes open.

Furthermore, a plurality of general ball entrances 27 are provided at the bottom of the gaming area 3. The gaming area 3 where various ball entrances etc. are arranged in this way is divided into a left gaming area (first gaming area) 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction, and a right gaming area (second gaming area) 3B on the right side. , can be divided into A batting style in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left gaming area 3A is called left-handed hitting, and a batting style in which the gaming ball is launched in such a way that it flows down in the right gaming area 3B is called right-handed batting. . In this pachinko game machine 1, when starting a game, the player aims to hit the ball to the left into the first starting hole 20. On the other hand, when the game state changes due to a hit in the judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, the gate 28, the second starting port 21, the first big winning port 30, and the second The aim is to land the ball in the grand prize opening 35. When a game ball enters the first starting hole, the second starting hole, the first big winning hole, the second big winning hole, or the general ball entering hole, a predetermined ball will be placed in each ball entering hole. A number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls") are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section) that displays a first special symbol in a variable manner and stops, and a second special symbol display that displays a second special symbol in a variable manner and stops. It includes a device 41b (second special symbol display section), and a normal symbol display 42 (normal symbol display section) that displays normal symbols in a variable and stopped manner. In addition, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the stored number of validity determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, and a first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the number of memory determination information (first special symbol reservation) regarding the first special symbol; It includes a second special pattern holding display 43b that displays the number of memorized numbers of 2 special pattern holdings), and a normal pattern holding display 44 that displays the number of memory holdings of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42. ing.

In addition, the main display 40 includes a hit indicator 48 that indicates that the result of the first special symbol validity determination or the second special symbol validity determination has become a hit (specific result); When the result of the special symbol validity determination is a hit, a round indicator 45 that shows the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, a game status indicator 46 that shows that the probability variation function is activated, and a game ball launch. A firing direction indicator 47 is included that indicates the direction, ie, whether the ball should be shot to the right or the left. The various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main control section, which will be described later.

The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. In addition, in the following explanation, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as the special symbol display section 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as the special figure holding display section 43.

In the special symbol display section 41, a special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopped, and the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 according to the special symbol (stop pattern) that is stopped and displayed. The results of the lottery (special symbol validity judgment, jackpot lottery) based on the above will be announced. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the special symbol appropriateness determination. If the stopping symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, if it is a jackpot symbol or a small winning symbol), the opening pattern will be released according to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped and displayed. A special game (a jackpot game, a small win game) in which the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 is opened is played. In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 and second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i to p", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol validity determination. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol validity determination is the first result (15R jackpot), three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Moreover, when the second result (2R jackpot) is obtained, four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Further, when the third result (small win) is obtained, four LEDs of "mnop" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Furthermore, in the event of a failure, two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off.

Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol validity determination. As for the stop display mode, similarly to the first special symbol display 41b, different display modes are determined depending on the result of the second special symbol validity determination. In addition, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time, and the manner of the variable display is such that, for example, light repeatedly flows from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on as shown in FIG.

In this pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various information such as a random number for determining the validity of a special symbol ("acquired information") is based on the entering of the ball. ), and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage section 85 formed in the RAM of the main control section. Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special pattern holding storage unit 85a as a first special pattern reservation, and if the ball enters the second starting port 21, it is stored as a second special pattern. It is stored as a hold in the second special figure hold storage section 85b. An upper limit is set for the number of (unused) special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage section 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. These first special figure reservation storage section 85a and second special figure reservation storage section 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and collectively as "acquisition information storage means". .

The special symbol reservation stored in the special symbol reservation storage section 85 is consumed when the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner based on the special symbol reservation. Extinguishing the special pattern reservation means to judge the special symbol propriety judgment random number etc. corresponding to the special pattern reservation (big hit, small hit, miss, jackpot type, etc.) and to show the judgment result. This refers to the execution of a variable display of symbols. Therefore, in this pachinko game machine 1, if the special symbol variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately upon entry, that is, the special symbol variation display Even when a display is being executed or a special game is being executed, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether the special symbols are correct or not for the entered ball, up to a predetermined number.

The number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation display 43a is composed of two LEDs "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of first special figures reserved, the first special figure This displays the number of pending items. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u□v□" (for example, □: off, ●: lit in red, ▲: lit in green), and the number of pending is 1. In the case of ``u□v●'', the display mode can be such that the LED for u is turned off and the LED for v is turned on in red. Furthermore, when the number of reservations is 2, the display mode may be such that the LED for u is lit in red and the LED for v is turned off, such as "u●v□". Furthermore, when the number of reservations is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u●v●".

Further, when the number of reservations is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green as a display mode such as "u▲v▲". In addition, the second special figure holding display 43b is composed of two LEDs "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figures holding, the second special figure holding display 43b It displays numbers. For example, if the number of reservations is 0, the display format is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w□x□" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of reservations is 1 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The fluctuating display of the normal symbols is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 displays the normal symbols in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, then stops displaying them, and uses the stopped and displayed normal symbols (stopped symbols) to indicate the result of the normal symbol validity determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. inform. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol validity determination. When the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (winning normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol validity determination depending on the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit is stopped and displayed, such as "s■t■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). If the determination result is a failure, a normal failure symbol such as "s□t■" in which only the t LED is lit is displayed. Furthermore, the out-of-place normal symbol is not a specific normal symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time period, and the manner of the variable display is, for example, in such a manner that both LEDs alternately turn on and off. be.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as "obtained information") such as a random number for determining whether a normal symbol is correct or not is obtained based on the passing of the game ball, and various information obtained is temporarily stored as a general pattern reservation in the general pattern reservation storage section 86 formed in the RAM of the main control section. An upper limit is set for the number of ordinary figures that can be stored in the ordinary figures reservation storage section 86, and the upper limit in the first embodiment is four.

The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage section 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine the random number for normal symbol propriety determination corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a fluctuating display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, when the fluctuating display of the regular symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. However, it is possible to reserve the right to judge the validity of normal symbols for the passage of a predetermined number of symbols as an upper limit. The number of such ordinary figures on hold is displayed on the ordinary figures on hold display 44.

Specifically, the Fuzuzu reservation display 44 is composed of two LEDs "qr", and displays the number of Fuzuzu reservations by lighting up the LEDs according to the number of Fuzuzu reservations. be. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, the display format is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q□r□" (for example, □: off, ●: lit in red, ▲: lit in green), and the number of pending is 1. In this case, the display mode can be such as "q□r●" in which the q LED is turned off and the r LED is lit in red. Further, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (also referred to as a "main control unit", a "game control unit" ), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control unit" and also referred to as a "performance control unit") that performs control regarding the performance executed as the game progresses, and a payout control that performs control regarding the payout of game balls. The board 110 (also referred to as the "payout control unit"), the effect symbols 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the symbols displayed on the effect display 102, the first effect pending display 103a, the second effect pending display 103b, etc. The image control board 100 (also referred to as an "image control unit") that performs display control is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case that stores the main control board 80 is provided approximately at the center of the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case. is provided with an image control board storage case that stores an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and an image control board 100, and a sub-control board storage case that stores a sub-control board 90 on the image control board storage case. A case is provided. Further, a payout control board case for storing a payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power board case for storing a power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

A one-chip microcomputer for game control (hereinafter referred to as "microcomputer for game control") 81 is mounted on the main control board 80 and controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 includes the above-mentioned special pattern holding storage section 85 (first special drawing holding storage section 85a and second special drawing holding storage section 85b), regular drawing holding storage section 86, A backup area 161 (also referred to as a ``main control backup area'') is provided to store and retain information indicating the gaming status at that time (also referred to as ``gaming status information'') when detected (when a power cutoff occurs). There is. Note that this backup area 161 is a save area for storing predetermined gaming state information to be backed up among the information stored in the RAM of the main control unit 80 for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped. It is. Then, when the power supply is resumed, it becomes possible to restore (recover) the predetermined gaming state when the drop in power supply voltage was detected, based on the gaming state information stored and held in this backup area 161. . These processes are also referred to as "gaming state information recovery means".

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the main control board 80 includes the probability of determining a jackpot, the probability of determining a small hit, and the probability of determining a jackpot in the first special symbol validity determination and the second special symbol validity determination. A "mode setting switch 82" is provided that allows the probability of determining the type of jackpot to be changed from the outside by a predetermined input operation. As shown in FIG. 6, this "mode setting switch 82" is a sliding switch that can change settings in five stages. In addition, a game store clerk or the like (mode setter, probability setter) may slide the operating portion 82a of the mode setting switch 82 to the left or right (perform a predetermined input operation) under specific conditions described below. ), it is possible to select any game mode. In FIG. 6, it is assumed that the operation unit 82a is placed in a position for selecting "gaming mode 3", and the gaming mode is set to "gaming mode 3".

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to select any game mode from five types of game modes by inputting an input to the mode setting switch 82. It has five game modes: game mode 1, game mode 2, game mode 3, game mode 4, and game mode 5. In FIG. 6, by positioning the operating section 82a at the leftmost setting position (position [1]) of the mode setting switch 82, the gaming mode can be set to gaming mode 1. Further, by positioning the operating section 82a at the second setting position from the left of the mode setting switch 82 (position [2]), it is possible to set the gaming mode to gaming mode 2. Furthermore, by positioning the operating section 82a at the third setting position from the left of the mode setting switch 82 (position [3]), it becomes possible to set the gaming mode to gaming mode 3 (Fig. 6 (setting mode). Furthermore, by positioning the operating section 82a at the second setting position from the right of the mode setting switch 82 (position [4]), it is possible to set the gaming mode to gaming mode 4. Furthermore, by positioning the operating section 82a at the rightmost setting position ([5] position) of the mode setting switch 82, it becomes possible to set the gaming mode to gaming mode 5 (see FIG. 6). .

Furthermore, by moving (positioning) the operating section 82a of the mode setting switch 82 to an arbitrary setting position, the game mode can be set to any game mode of the setter. The setting state of the mode setting switch 82, that is, the position of the operating section 82a is monitored by the CPU of the main control board 80, and the position of the operating section 82a of the mode setting switch 82 (selected by the operator) is (selection information indicating the selected gaming mode). Then, when an operator such as a game clerk performs a predetermined input operation on the mode setting switch 82 to change the game mode, and the selection information is changed, the CPU of the main control board 80 performs a predetermined input operation to change the game mode. determines whether the change conditions are met (determines whether the operation was performed under specific conditions), and if so, sets the gaming mode corresponding to the selected information (changes the mode), and if the change conditions are met. If not, the game mode corresponding to the selection information is not set (the mode is not changed). When this change condition is met, the means for setting the game mode (changing the settings) is also referred to as "judgment probability setting means." Furthermore, the mode setting switch 82 (including the operating section 82a, etc.) is also referred to as a "judgment probability selection means", and information indicating the position (selected setting) selected by the mode setting switch 82 is "selection information". Also called.

Here, each game mode (game mode 1 to game mode 5) will be explained using FIG. 10. When the game mode is set to "gaming mode 1", the jackpot probability (probability of being judged as a jackpot in the first special symbol correctness determination and probability of being judged as a jackpot in the second special symbol correctness judgment) is low. It is 1/630 in a probability state (normal state) and 1/63 in a high probability state. Further, the small hit probability is set to 1/160 for both the first special symbol validity determination and the second special symbol validity determination. In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot type determination judgment) when it becomes a jackpot in the first special symbol correctness judgment is 40% for 15R 1st jackpot, 50% for 15R 2nd jackpot, and 10% for 2R 3rd jackpot. It is distributed by. The random number for determining the jackpot type is composed of 100 values from 0 to 99, and one of the values is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the starting hole (first starting hole or second starting hole), and depending on the obtained value, The jackpot type is determined. In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot type determination judgment) when a jackpot occurs in the second special symbol validity judgment is 100% of the 15R fourth jackpot. That is, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the second special symbol validity determination, it will always be a 15R fourth jackpot. Note that the jackpot probability is also referred to as the "judgment probability."

Next, when the game mode is set to "Game Mode 2", the jackpot probability (probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the first special symbol validity determination, and probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the second special symbol validity determination) is 1/315 in a low probability state (normal state) and 1/63 in a high probability state. Other conditions are the same as in game mode 1. Next, when the game mode is set to "Game Mode 3", the jackpot probability (probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the first special symbol validity determination, and probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the second special symbol validity determination) is 1/210 in a low probability state (normal state) and 1/63 in a high probability state. Other conditions are the same as in game mode 1. Comparing these gaming modes 1 to 3, it is said that the jackpot probability (so-called first hit probability) in a low probability state is different, and gaming mode 3 is the most advantageous for the player, followed by gaming mode 2. is advantageous, and game mode 3 is the most disadvantageous game mode for the player.

Next, when the game mode is set to "gaming mode 4", the jackpot probability (probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the first special symbol validity determination, and probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the second special symbol validity determination) is 1/315 in a low probability state (normal state) and 1/42 in a high probability state. Further, the small hit probability is set to 1/90 for both the first special symbol validity determination and the second special symbol validity determination. In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot type determination judgment) when it becomes a jackpot in the first special symbol correctness judgment is 30% for 15R 1st jackpot, 60% for 15R 2nd jackpot, and 10% for 2R 3rd jackpot. It is distributed by. In this game mode 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is the same as in game mode 2, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/42, and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is the highest among the game modes. has been done. As will be described later, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment performs special symbol validity determination a predetermined number of times in the high probability state, and if no jackpot is determined, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shifts to the low probability state ( The specifications are said to be so-called ``ST machines'' and ``variable number-cut gaming machines.'') Therefore, this game mode 4 is considered to have the highest possibility of the next jackpot occurring in a high probability state compared to other game modes. That is, this gaming mode 4 can be said to be the setting (gaming mode) in which the high probability state is least likely to end without generating a jackpot.

On the other hand, in determining the jackpot type, it is set at a disadvantage compared to other game modes. Specifically, in determining the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs in the first special symbol correctness determination, the proportion of the 15R first jackpot, which has a high possibility of being awarded a benefit (high probability state), is determined compared to other game modes. The ratio of the 15R second jackpot, which has a low possibility of being awarded a benefit (high probability state), is set higher than in other game modes. As a result, in game mode 4, there is a high possibility that the next jackpot will occur in the high probability state, but there is a low possibility that the high probability state will continue based on the jackpot.

Next, when the game mode is set to "gaming mode 5", the jackpot probability (probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the first special symbol validity determination, and probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the second special symbol validity determination) is 1/315 in a low probability state (normal state) and 1/90 in a high probability state. Further, the small hit probability is set to 1/210 for both the first special symbol validity determination and the second special symbol validity determination. In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot type determination judgment) when it becomes a jackpot in the first special symbol correctness judgment is 50% for 15R 1st jackpot, 40% for 15R 2nd jackpot, and 10% for 2R 3rd jackpot. It is distributed by. In this game mode 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is the same as that in game mode 2, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/90, and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is the lowest among the game modes. has been done. Therefore, in this game mode 5, compared to other game modes, the possibility that the next jackpot will occur in the high probability state is the lowest, and there is a possibility that the high probability state will end without a jackpot occurring. This can be said to be the highest setting. On the other hand, in determining the jackpot type, it is set to be advantageous compared to other game modes. Specifically, in determining the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs in the first special symbol correctness determination, the proportion of the 15R first jackpot, which has a high possibility of being awarded a benefit (high probability state), is determined compared to other game modes. The ratio of the 15R second jackpot, which has a low possibility of being awarded a benefit (high probability state), is set lower than in other game modes. As a result, in game mode 5, the possibility that the next jackpot will occur in a high probability state is low, but if a jackpot occurs, there is a high possibility that the high probability state will continue based on the jackpot. ing.

In this way, there are game modes that are disadvantageous and advantageous compared to others, and there is a high probability of hitting the jackpot in the high probability state (during the bonus granting state), but when the jackpot occurs, the high probability state is Game modes with a low possibility of continuation (possibility of receiving benefits again), and game modes where the possibility of a jackpot in a high probability state is low, but there is a high possibility that the high probability state will continue in the event of a jackpot. It has a variety of game modes that can accommodate the tastes of various players. As a result, a player who selects a gaming machine selects a predetermined gaming machine and plays a game, expecting that the gaming machine is set to his or her preferred gaming mode. Also, since the small hit probability is different in game modes 1 to 3, game mode 4, and game mode 5, the player can set it by counting the number of times the small win occurs during the game. It becomes possible to predict to some extent the game mode that is currently playing. This allows the player to guess whether the gaming machine he or she is playing is set to the desired gaming mode, and use this as an indicator to continue playing. This makes it possible to add new interest to the game and increase interest in the game.

In addition, in these game modes, it is also possible to make some or all of the aspects such as the displayed identification information (effect patterns), the characters that appear, and the reach effect (character effect) different. This makes it possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment has a main control board 80, a payout control board 110, other control boards (sub control board 90, image control board 100), etc. A power supply board 109 is provided for supplying driving power. This power supply board 109 is provided with a power supply section 104 for supplying drive power (power supply) to each control board, etc., and a voltage drop monitoring circuit 105 for monitoring a drop in the power supply voltage supplied to the power supply board. ing. In addition, the power supply board 109 is provided as a switch for a game clerk or the like to perform a predetermined input operation (turns ON by pressing the left side and turns OFF by pressing the right side). A power switch 84 that can start or stop the supply of power supply voltage, and a backup area provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 and a backup area provided in the RAM of the payout control unit 110 by performing a predetermined input operation. It is provided with a RAM clear switch 83 that erases the storage contents of the area and initializes it. This power supply board 109 is also referred to as "power supply means". Further, the power supply board 109 may be composed of one board or a plurality of boards. This also applies to the main control board 80, payout control board 110, sub-control board 90, and other control boards.

When only the power switch 84 is turned ON while power is not being supplied to the pachinko game machine 1 (power OFF state), power supply voltage is supplied to the power supply board 109, and the power supply board 109 supplies power to various control boards. Necessary driving power is supplied. If the gaming state information when the power is OFF (when the power is low) is normally stored (retained in memory) in the backup area, the game when the power is OFF (when the power is low) is stored based on the gaming state information. After restoring the state, it becomes possible to play (this is also referred to as "gaming state information recovery means"). On the other hand, when turning on the power switch 84, if the power switch 84 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 83 for a predetermined period, the input information (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch is transferred from the power supply board 109 to the main control. If there is gaming state information input to the section 80 and the payout control section 110 and stored in the backup area (the main control section 80 and the payout control section 110), the stored gaming state information is erased and initialized. (This is also referred to as "gaming state information initialization means"). This makes it possible to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1 to its initial state.

In addition, when operating the RAM clear switch to erase the stored (backed up) gaming state information, among the stored gaming state information, the gaming state information excluding specific gaming state information (game state information to be erased) ) may be deleted. Game state information that is not erased even by this RAM clear (initialization) operation is referred to as "specific game state information." "Specific gaming status information" is, for example, the base value (first base value, second base value) described later, which is used to confirm the operating status of the gaming machine, and to be used by third parties (police, inspection agencies, etc.). This is gaming information used when inspecting gaming machines. In addition, other gaming status information (for example, unpaid prize ball information, status information (probability change, time saving, jackpot), gaming mode information, error information, etc.) is subject to deletion by RAM clear (initialization) operation. .

Further, the voltage drop monitoring circuit 105 monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC 24V, DC 12V, DC 5V, etc.) used in the pachinko game machine 1, and the voltage value to be monitored drops to a predetermined value. Then (when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected), a "power-off signal" indicating this is output to the CPU of the main control unit 80, the CPU of the payout control unit 110, etc. (see FIG. 6). . In addition, the CPU of the main control board 80 and the CPU of the payout control board 110, which have received the power-off signal transmitted from the power supply board 109, store and hold gaming state information stored in their respective RAMs in a backup area (described later). Performs power-off monitoring processing. Here, in the RAM of the main control board 80 and the RAM of the payout control board 110, a storage area for storing game state information during a game is also referred to as a "gaming state information storage means", and when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected, The backup area that stores game state information to be backed up is also referred to as "memory holding means."

Further, a part or all of the RAM of the main control board 80 and the RAM of the payout control board 110 are used as backup areas, and are backed up by a backup power supply (backup voltage) included in the power supply section of the power supply board 109. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to a power outage or a power OFF operation, these RAM The contents (gaming state information) of the backup target (memory retention target) stored in are saved (memory retention). This gaming status information includes at least information indicating the set gaming mode (gaming mode information), data indicating the gaming status (status information), data corresponding to the control status of the main control unit (special symbol status), and data indicating the gaming status (status information). flag, normal symbol status flag, pending storage counter value, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.), data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls (unpaid prize ball information), etc.

These gaming state information are stored (stored and retained) in a backup area (backup RAM) to which power supply is maintained by a backup power source. Furthermore, "data according to the control state of the main control unit" refers to data that corresponds to the control state (gaming state) after a power outage, etc., when power supply is restarted. This data is necessary to restore the control state (gaming state) to the current state (before the power outage occurred). Although not shown, the RAM of the sub-control unit 90 is also provided with a backup area similarly to the main control unit 80 etc., so that when a power outage etc. occurs, the gaming status information stored in the RAM of the sub-control unit 90 ( The number of pending memories, pre-read information, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) may be stored and retained, and the contents of the backup area of the RAM may be saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the main control board 80 is provided with (mounted on) a mode setting lock section 89 for enabling the setting change of the game mode described above. As mentioned above, in order for a game store clerk or the like to select an arbitrary game mode by sliding the operation part 82a of the mode setting switch 82 to the left or right (by performing a predetermined input operation), It is necessary to operate the mode setting lock section 89. As will be described in detail later, at least one step is to insert a setting key (not shown) into the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock 89 and operate (rotate) the setting key to turn the mode setting lock 89 ON. One condition is that the game mode can be changed. Note that the state in which the longitudinal direction of the insertion portion 89a is vertical (as shown by the solid line in FIG. 6) is OFF. When the setting key is inserted into the insertion part 89a in this OFF state and the setting key is rotated 90 degrees to the right (rotated by a predetermined amount in one direction), the longitudinal direction of the insertion part 89a becomes horizontal (as shown by the broken line in FIG. 6). ). This state becomes the ON state.

The game mode can be changed with at least one condition of being in this ON state. Further, this mode setting lock section 89 is connected to the CPU of the main control section 80 in the main control board 80, and the CPU of the main control section 80 determines whether the mode setting lock section 89 is in the ON state or in the OFF state. Alternatively, it is possible to determine (identify) when the mode setting lock section 89 is turned on, when it is turned off, etc. In addition, when the mode setting lock 89 is turned ON and the setting of the game mode is changed (including when the setting is not changed), the setting key is rotated 90 degrees to the left (rotated by a predetermined amount in the other direction) to initialize. By returning it to the OFF position, the game mode setting change operation is completed, and the game machine is brought into a "playable state" in which the player can play.

Further, in this embodiment, when a setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 89a, the inserted setting key cannot be removed in the ON position, but can only be removed in the OFF position. This makes it possible to prevent a game store clerk or the like from completing the setting change work with the mode setting lock section 89 in the OFF state, and leaving the game machine in a "non-playable state." Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 80 is housed in a main control board case and sealed (configured so that it cannot be opened without destruction). Then, only the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock part 89 and its surrounding area are exposed from the main control board case, so that the setting key can be inserted into the insertion part 89a from outside the main control board case. There is. That is, the game mode settings can be changed while the main control board case is sealed (closed). The setting key can only be removed from the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock section 89 in the OFF position, but it can also be inserted only in the OFF position. That is, this setting key can be inserted into and removed from the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 only in the OFF position.

The main control board 80 is also provided with an information display section 88 (also referred to as a "game information display section") for displaying predetermined game information at a predetermined timing (in a predetermined period). ing). As shown in FIG. 6, the information display unit 88 includes four LED indicators (a first information display unit 88a, a second information display unit 88b, a third information display unit 88c, and a third information display unit 88c) on the main control board 80. 4 information display sections 88d) are arranged (mounted) adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction. In addition, each LED display has a seven-segment display section and a dot display section, and by controlling the display by combining these four LED displays, it is possible to perform a wide variety of displays. It becomes. In addition, this information display section 88 can display the gaming mode set by the above-mentioned "judgment probability setting means" and the base values (first base value, second base value) to be described later. be. When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on), all the display sections (LED displays) constituting the information display section 88 are displayed in a predetermined display mode for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). For example, all the display parts (8 display parts with 7 segments + dots) of the 4 information display parts (88a, 88b, 88c, 88d) are displayed blinking (for example, lit for 0.5 seconds, 0.5 (repeatedly extinguishing the light for seconds). By checking the initial display mode when the power is turned on, it is possible to check whether there are any failures or defects in the display sections (32 in total) that constitute the information display section 88. Further, in order to facilitate confirmation, it is desirable to perform display control of the same display mode on all display units at approximately the same timing.

Further, it is assumed that the information display section 88 is always in a display state of displaying some game information after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the game mode display state ("game mode change state", "game mode confirmation state") is in which the game mode is displayed from the time the power is turned on until the game becomes possible, and the game mode is displayed in the state in which the game mode is displayed. When the game becomes possible, a base display state is entered in which a base value, which will be described later, is displayed. That is, it is assumed that no game information is displayed, that is, it is not turned off. As a result, it is possible to always display some kind of gaming information according to the state of the gaming machine, and to grasp the gaming information quickly and reliably. In addition, by touching the information display section 88 in a state where no game information is displayed, it is possible to recognize that there is some kind of failure or malfunction in the information display section 88, the control section that controls the display, wiring, etc. This makes it possible to quickly carry out repairs and countermeasures. In addition, if (all) of the plurality of stored base values such as the first base value and the second base value are outside the reference base value range described in the gaming machine manual etc., the game If there is any problem with a nail, game component, etc., you can contact the manufacturer or the like. This also reduces the possibility of unexpected disadvantages occurring.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and signals are output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include an out sensor 29, a first starting hole sensor 20a, a second starting hole sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first big winning hole sensor 30a, a second big winning hole sensor 35a, and a specific area sensor. 39a, and the general ball entrance sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The out sensor 29 is for counting the number (total number) of game balls fired into the game area, and counts all the game balls fired into the game area 3, that is, the number of balls that enter any ball entrance. This system detects all the game balls that are discharged outside the game machine through the ball inlet and the game balls that are discharged outside the game machine through the out port without entering any of the ball entry ports. Therefore, it is provided below the outlet 18 provided at the lowest part of the gaming area 3. Further, the out sensor may be provided on the game board 2 or may be provided on the game machine frame 50. The output is based on the total number of outs (total effective number of fired balls) counted by this out sensor 29 and the balls entering the ball entry ports (first starting port 20, second starting port 21, general ball entering port 27). A base value, which will be described later, is calculated based on the total number of prize balls and is displayed on the information display section 88 described above. Here, the counting means for counting the number of outs is sometimes called the "first counting means", and the means for counting the number of prize balls is sometimes called the "second counting means".

Further, the first starting port sensor 20a is provided within the first starting port 20 to detect a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided within the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided in the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in a specific area 39 in the second big prize opening 35, and detects game balls that have passed through the specific area 39 among the game balls that have entered the second big prize opening 35. be. The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in a non-specific area 49 in the second grand prize opening 35, and detects game balls that have passed through the non-specific area 49 among the game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening 35. It is something to do. The general ball entrance sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entrance 27 to detect a game ball that has entered the general ball entrance 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first big winning port solenoid 33, the second big winning port solenoid 38, and the movable piece solenoid 151 are connected. These various solenoids are also referred to as "driving means". The second starting opening solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22, and the first big winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. be. Further, the second big prize opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36, and the movable piece solenoid 151 is for driving the movable piece 150 of the second big winning device 36. be. Furthermore, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, a second special symbol reservation display 43b, and a regular symbol display 42. A hold indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game status indicator 46, a firing direction indicator 47, and a hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 includes a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, which stores information on an inserted prepaid card (gaming value storage medium), etc.). A device that allows ball lending based on information about the ball is connected to the terminal, and a firing device 112 is also connected via a firing control board 111 (also referred to as a "launching control section"). Firing device 112 includes firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 has a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a "payout control microcomputer") that controls the payout of game balls of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input/output circuit 117. It is driven to pay out prize balls or pay out rental balls. The game balls that are paid out are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. Note that when the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the firing device 112, the touch sensor 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 adjusts the rotation of the firing handle 60. Detect the amount. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

The main control board 80 also sends various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer 91 (``performance control microcomputer'') that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the game production as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. There is. The production control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via the input/output circuit 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the production control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub-control board 90. The production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 causes the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100 to display images based on commands received from the main control board 80. Display control of the device 7, the effect display 102, the first effect pending display 103a, and the second effect pending display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including performance patterns, reserved patterns, etc.) Image data such as images and background images are stored. The CPU of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The performance display device 102 consists of two LEDs, and performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the fluctuating display and stop display of the performance pattern 8, and changes the performance pattern by turning on/off the two LEDs or by a combination of colors. 8 is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the display result (result of special symbol validity judgment). In addition, the first performance pending display 103a and the second performance pending display 103b are similarly composed of two LEDs. Then, by lighting and extinguishing the two LEDs or by a combination of colors, the first performance reservation display 103a displays the number of reservations displayed in the first performance reservation display area 9c and the first special symbol reservation display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that shows the same number of pending items as the number of pending items. In addition, the second performance reservation display 103b is controlled to display the same number of reservations as the number of reservations displayed in the second performance reservation display area 9d and the number of reservations displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b. Ru. This can be done by displaying character symbols on substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect pattern display section), or by operating the movable decorative member 14 to display almost the entire effect pattern display area 7b (effect pattern display section) on the display screen 7a. Such a display device is provided because part or all of the performance design, first performance pending display section, or second performance pending display section may become invisible due to covering. . Note that a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 also generates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, lighting color, etc.) that determines the lighting mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 based on commands received from the main control board 80. , also referred to as lamp data) from data stored in the ROM, and controls the lighting of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107.

Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 91 drives an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80 to control the movable decorative members. 14 and 17 are operated. The movable decorative member 14 (also referred to as a "plate movable part" or "first movable member") is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10. In addition, the movable decorative member 17 (also referred to as a "frame movable part" or a "second movable member") is controlled by the performance control microcomputer 91, which has operation pattern data for operating the movable decorative members 14 and 17 in a predetermined operation mode. (also referred to as "drive data") is determined from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and the motion of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined motion pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member 14. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, the sub-control board 90 is connected to an origin sensor 14b that detects that the movable decorative member 14 is at the starting position (initial state), that is, at the origin. This origin sensor 14b constitutes a movable decoration unit together with the movable decoration member 14, and as shown by the broken line in FIG. Sometimes, it is provided so that its presence can be detected. When the movable decorative member 14 is at the starting position, the signal (origin sensor signal) input from the origin sensor 14b to the sub-control board 90 is ON, and when the movable decorative member 14 is not at the starting position, the origin sensor signal is OFF. Become. The origin sensor 14b may be any sensor that can detect the approach of a sensing object in a non-contact manner, and may be a photo sensor, a proximity sensor, or the like.

Further, the sub-control board 90 is connected to an origin sensor 17b that detects that the movable decorative member 17 is at the starting position (initial state), that is, at the origin. This origin sensor 17b constitutes a movable decorative unit together with the movable decorative member 17, and is capable of detecting the presence inside (back side) of the movable decorative member 17 when the movable decorative member 17 is at the starting position. It is set up so that When the movable decorative member 17 is at the starting position, the signal (origin sensor signal) input from the origin sensor 14b to the sub-control board 90 is ON, and when the movable decorative member 17 is not at the starting position, the origin sensor signal is OFF. Become. The origin sensor 17b may be any sensor that can detect the approach of a sensing object without contact, and may be a photo sensor, a proximity sensor, or the like.

Further, the sub-control board 90 includes a first performance button detection switch 63c and a first performance button detection switch 63c that detects that the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 production button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b, a signal is outputted from the corresponding performance button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

Next, control related to the validity determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be explained. As a result of the special symbol validity determination, there are "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". At the time of "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In addition, when there is a "small win", the "small win symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. Moreover, when it is a "miss", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. When a jackpot or small win is determined, a "special game" is executed in which the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. . A special game that is executed as a jackpot is called a "jackpot game," and a special game that is executed as a small win is called a "small win game." As for the types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, one or more special symbols may be provided for each of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss".

There are multiple types of jackpots. As shown in FIG. 7, the types of wins include "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "15R 2nd jackpot", "2R 3rd jackpot", and "15R 4th jackpot". In "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 4th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) is 15 times, and the first round and This is a jackpot that opens the second grand prize opening 35 in a manner that allows (easily) the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 (simply referred to as "V") in the second round. A round in which the game ball aims to pass through the specific area 39 (a predetermined benefit is given when the game ball passes through the specific area) can be called a V round, a chance round, or a challenge round. Note that this V round (specific round) is a round in which the movable piece 150 is operated, and in rounds other than the V round (non-specific round), the movable piece 150 is not operated. That is, even if it is a round that opens the second grand prize opening 35, if it is a round other than a V round, the movable piece 150 does not operate and the specific area 39 is always in a closed state. Even if the ball enters the second grand prize opening 35, the game ball will not be guided to the specific area 39. That is, rounds other than the V round can also be said to be "rounds in which the game ball cannot pass through a specific area."

In addition, "15R 2nd jackpot" means that the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) is 15 times, but 1 round is the chance round mentioned above. The opening time of the game ball and the second round are extremely short (opening and closing momentarily), making it difficult to enter the second grand prize opening 35 and making it difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to pass into the specific area 39. It is said to be a big hit. That is, this "15R second jackpot" can be said to be a jackpot that does not open the second jackpot device 36 in a manner that allows (easily) the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39. In "2R 3rd Jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (2nd big winning hole 35) is 2 times, and in the 1st and 2nd rounds which are V rounds, it is not possible to open for that long. Although there is no game ball, the game ball is opened into the second big prize opening 35 in such a manner that it can enter. Specifically, in each round, the release is performed once for "0.9 s". That is, the 2R third jackpot is a jackpot that opens the second jackpot device 36 in a manner that allows the game ball to pass to the specific area 39. However, since the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 is 1.8 seconds for the first and second rounds combined, although it is possible for the game ball to pass to the specific area 39, the 15R first jackpot The possibility of the game ball passing into the specific area 39 is lower.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, based on the passage of a game ball to the specific area 39 during a jackpot game, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to a high probability state to be described later. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol validity determination is the aforementioned 15R 1st jackpot, 2R 3rd jackpot, or 15R 4th jackpot, the possibility of the game ball passing to the specific area (15R 2nd jackpot) Since the first and second V rounds are executed in a relatively high manner (in comparison), by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game can be changed. It becomes possible to shift to a high probability state. On the other hand, in the case of the 15R second jackpot, the opening time of the first and second chance rounds is 0.1 seconds each, so although it is a V round, the second jackpot Since it is very difficult to let the game ball enter the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is the normal state described below. (low probability state) is very likely (it can be said that it is a low probability state).

On the other hand, the opening pattern of the small winning game that is executed when a small winning occurs is to open the second big prize opening 35 twice for 0.9 seconds (make it possible to enter the ball). ) is considered a thing. The opening pattern of this small winning game is apparently the same opening pattern as the 2R third jackpot game, and it is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a small winning game or a 2R jackpot game. . Therefore, just by looking at these opening patterns, it is not possible to distinguish whether the winning game to be executed is a small winning game or a 2R jackpot game. That is, when a small hit occurs, the second big winning device 36 is opened twice in such a manner that the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 35. However, since the movable piece 150 does not operate during the execution of the small winning game, even if the game ball enters the second big prize opening 35, the game ball will not pass through the specific area 39. Even if a game ball passes through the specific area 39 for some reason, in rounds other than the V round, there is an invalid period in which passing through the specific area 39 (detected by the specific area sensor 39a) is not treated as valid. Therefore, no benefits will be given based on passing through the specific area 39.

Therefore, the game state after the execution of the small winning game is not changed from before the execution of the small winning game. Therefore, if the gaming state before the execution of the small winning game is a normal state (low probability state), the gaming state after the execution of the small winning game will also be the normal state. From the player's perspective, it is difficult to distinguish between the 2R third jackpot and the small win even by looking at the opening pattern of the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35). That is, it is difficult for the player to recognize from the opening pattern of the big winning hole whether the result of the special symbol validity determination is a 2R third jackpot or a small win. In addition, in terms of performance, it is difficult for players to distinguish between the jackpot game related to the 2R third jackpot and the small win game related to the small win, as well as during the subsequent fluctuating display of performance symbols. This makes it possible to perform common performances (presentation modes). Therefore, even if the game ball is passed through the specific area 39 during the special game as the 2R third jackpot, it is difficult to recognize whether the subsequent game state has shifted to a high probability state or not. In addition, the structure is such that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the operation mode of the movable piece 150 inside the second big prize opening 35 and whether or not the game ball has passed through a specific area. As a result, in the case of a small hit or a 2R third jackpot, play the game with the expectation that the winning game (small winning game or jackpot game) may be in a high probability state. It becomes possible to advance the game, and it becomes possible to increase the interest in the game. In addition, in the case of small winnings, the number of openings of the big winning hole is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of openings.

More specifically, the opening pattern of the jackpot when each jackpot and small jackpot in the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment is as shown in FIG. That is, when the 15R first jackpot is reached (the 15R first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), and when the 15R fourth jackpot is achieved (the second special symbol display 41b is 15R 4th jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), the second grand prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from 1R to 2R, and the first grand prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from 3R to 15R. . In this hit, since the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 in the 1st and 2nd rounds is 28 seconds, it is easy to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 during the round.

In addition, in the case of a 15R second jackpot (when the 15R second jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the second jackpot 35 is opened by a maximum of 0.1 from 1R to 2R. The first prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from 3R to 15R. In this hit, the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 in the 1st and 2nd rounds is extremely short, maximum 0.1 seconds each (instantaneous opening/closing), so the game ball is moved to the specific area 39 during that round. It is almost impossible to pass. That is, the opening pattern for the 15R second jackpot is different from the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot in the opening modes of the first round and the second round. That is, in the 15R first jackpot, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened for 28 seconds in the first and second rounds, which are the V rounds, so the game ball easily enters the second big prize opening 35. Since the movable piece 150 is also in operation, the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 35 will pass through the specific area 39 with a high probability. On the other hand, in the 15R second jackpot, the second jackpot 35 opens for only 0.1 seconds in the first and second rounds. Therefore, it is very difficult for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 35. Therefore, during execution of the 15R second jackpot, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is considerably lower than in the 15R first jackpot. Furthermore, since the possibility that the game ball will pass through the specific area 39 is extremely close to 0, it can be said that the game ball will not pass through it.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, when the 2R third jackpot occurs (when the 2R third jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the second The big prize openings 35 are each opened for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. In this hit, the maximum opening time of the second grand prize opening 35 for the 1st and 2nd rounds is 1.8 seconds, so if you enter the game ball into the second grand prize opening 35 during any round. Then, the movable piece 150 operates to allow the game ball to pass through to the specific area 39 which is in the open state. In this pachinko game machine 1, one game ball is fired in about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 is 1.8 seconds, it is fully possible to enter the game ball into the second big winning hole 35. Also, in this 2R third jackpot, the total opening time of the second prize opening is as short as 1.8 seconds, so it is not possible to expect as many prize balls (gaming profits) as in other 15R jackpots. In other words, this is a jackpot where you hardly get any prize balls compared to other jackpots (15R jackpot).

In addition, when the first small hit occurs (the first small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), and when the second small hit occurs (the second special symbol display 41b (when the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed), the second big prize opening 35 is opened twice for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. That is, the same big winning hole as the big winning hole opened in the 2R third jackpot game is opened in the same opening pattern. Further, the closing time between the first opening and the second opening in the small winning game and the interval time between the first round and the second round in the 2R third jackpot are set to be the same time. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the jackpot game related to the 2R third jackpot and the small win game related to the small win. Also, in this small win, since the total opening time of the second grand prize opening 35 is a maximum of 1.8 seconds, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second grand prize opening 35. However, as mentioned above, since the small winning game does not have a V round, the movable piece 150 does not operate and the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39. In addition, in this small hit, the total opening time of the jackpot is as short as 1.8 seconds, so it is not possible to expect as many prize balls as in the 2R third jackpot. In other words, the small win provides almost no benefits for the player, either in terms of the transition of the game state or the prize ball (only the prize ball is awarded by hitting the ball). That is, in this embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 35, the first opening pattern in which the game ball can pass (pass easily) through the specific area 39 (15 first jackpot, 15R fourth jackpot), A second open pattern in which it is difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 (15R second jackpot), and a second open pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area but has a lower possibility of passing through than the first open pattern. 3 opening pattern (2R third jackpot, small win).

Incidentally, the allocation probability to each jackpot in the determination of the validity of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is set corresponding to each game mode, as described above. In addition, all the jackpots in the judgment of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are the 15R fourth jackpot. In other words, if a jackpot is determined based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, which has become easier to enter due to the activation of the release extension function (occurrence of a high base state), which will be described later, the jackpot is guaranteed to be the 15R 4th jackpot. becomes. In this way, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, rather than hitting the jackpot in the winning/failure judgment (jackpot lottery of the first special symbol) made when a game ball enters the first starting opening 20, the game ball enters the second starting opening 21. It is set so that it is more likely to be advantageous for the player if the game ball hits the jackpot in the judgment of success or failure (jackpot lottery of the second special symbol). That is, the player plays the game expecting the ball to enter the second starting port 21. This is particularly noticeable during the operation of the release extension function, in which the frequency of balls entering the second starting port 21 increases.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a miss is made based on a "random number for special symbol validity determination (also referred to as "validity determination information")", and a jackpot is determined. In this case, the type of jackpot is determined based on the “random number for jackpot type determination (also referred to as “random number for symbol determination” or “information for symbol determination”)”. Each of this special symbol validity determination and jackpot type determination determination is also referred to as a "validity determination (determination)", and may also be collectively referred to as a "validity determination (determination)". As shown in FIG. 8(A), the random number for determining the validity of the special symbol takes a value in the range from 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range from 0 to 99. In addition, the random number (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 includes a "reach random number" in addition to the random number for determining the validity of the special symbol and the random number for determining the jackpot type. (also referred to as ``reach information'')'' and ``fluctuation pattern random numbers (also referred to as ``fluctuation pattern information'')''.

The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not to generate a reach in a game performance (performance symbol game performance) that shows the result using a performance symbol when the result of the special symbol propriety judgment is a failure. Reach, for example, refers to a state in which two production symbols 8R and 8L on the left and right are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the same symbol, and the remaining one medium production symbol 8C is fluctuating ("7↓7"). situation). If the fluctuating medium performance symbol 8C stops at the same symbol as the stopped performance symbols 8R and 8L, the three performance symbols will stop at the same symbol, resulting in a win. In this case, the stoppage (temporary stop) of the performance symbols also includes a somewhat swaying display (sway fluctuation) within the performance symbol display area 7b. This reach random number takes a value in the range from 0 to 126.

Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes values in the range from 0 to 198. Furthermore, the random numbers acquired based on passage through the gate 28 include the random numbers for normal symbol validity determination shown in FIG. 8(B). The normal symbol validity determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform the auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 (normal symbol lottery). Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range from 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of game states depending on the combinations in which the probability variation function, the variation time reduction function, and the opening extension function are activated or deactivated for special symbols and normal symbols. . The state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is referred to as the "high probability state", and the state in which it is not activated is referred to as the "normal state" (also referred to as the "low probability state"). ”. In the high probability state, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol validity determination (first special symbol validity determination and second special symbol validity determination) is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the jackpot determination table for the normal state is used to determine the success or failure, but in the high probability state, the jackpot determination table for the high probability state is used, in which there are many values of random numbers for special symbol validity determination that are determined to be jackpots. (See FIG. 9(A)). In other words, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability that the result of the special symbol variation display will be a jackpot (the stopped symbol will become a jackpot symbol) becomes higher than when it is not activated.

Further, a state in which the variable time reduction function is activated for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is referred to as a "time reduction state", and a state in which it is not activated is referred to as a "non-time reduction state". In the time saving state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbols (time from the start of the variable display to the time of final display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbols in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time-saving state, a variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time-saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure reservations are consumed becomes faster, and effective ball entry into the starting port (ball entry that can be stored as special figure reservation) is more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may operate at the same time, or only one of them may operate. The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbols operate in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbols. That is, the probability variation function and variation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the time saving state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning in normal symbol validity determination is higher than in the non-time-saving state. In other words, normal symbol correctness determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using a normal symbol hit determination table in which the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) that is determined to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the non-time saving state. (See Figure 8(D)). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variable display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stopped symbol will become a normal winning symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. .

Also, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. In the first embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8(E)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. In other words, the opening time extension function of the variable prize winning device 22 is operating. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time saving state. That is, the function of increasing the number of openings of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, in the non-time saving state, when the result of normal symbol validity determination is a hit, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs one opening operation for 0.2 seconds, and the second starting port remains open during that period. Become. In addition, in the time saving state, when the result of normal symbol validity determination is a hit, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 2.0 seconds three times.

Under the situation where the probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time shortening function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, compared to when these functions are not operating. As a result, the second starting port 21 is opened frequently, and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as a "high frequency state"). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls (ratio of award balls awarded), increases. Therefore, a state in which these functions are operating is called a "high base state", and a state in which they are not operating is called a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. In this embodiment, the base value calculated in the low base state is displayed on the information display section 88. That is, the number of outs (number of fired balls) and the number of prize balls in the high base state and jackpot game state are not reflected in the base value displayed on the information display section 88.

The high base state (high frequency state) does not require that all of the above functions operate. In other words, by operating at least one of the probability variation function and variation time shortening function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22, it is possible to increase the probability of winning from when that function is not activated. It is sufficient that the second starting port is easily opened (the ball enters the ball more frequently). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state can also be referred to as a "high base generation function."

As shown in FIG. 7, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the gaming state after the special game when the 15R first jackpot is reached is as follows: , a high probability state of special symbols, a time saving state of special symbols, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state." The high-accuracy-high base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times, or when a jackpot is achieved and a jackpot game is executed.

In addition, since it is extremely difficult to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game, the gaming state after the special game in the case of the 15R second jackpot is the normal state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the special symbol, And it becomes a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability high base state (also referred to as a "time saving mode")". The low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. Although the possibility is extremely low, if it were to pass through the specific area 39, it would be in a "high-precision, high-base state." In addition, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the gaming state after the special game in the case of the 2R third jackpot will be the high of the special symbol if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. It is a probability state, a non-time saving state with special symbols, and a low base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high-accuracy/low-base state." The high probability/low base state ends when a predetermined number of variable displays of special symbols are executed, or when a jackpot is achieved and a jackpot game is executed.

This high probability low base state is a state in which a high probability state is latent, that is, a state in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that it is a high probability state. In other words, the high-probability-low base state is a so-called "latency-probability variable state." In addition, a state in which it is not reported whether the jackpot probability of the current special symbol validity determination is low probability or high probability (low probability state or high probability state) is referred to as a "probability non-reporting state". On the other hand, the above-mentioned high probability high base state is a state in which it is clear to the player that it is a high probability state. In other words, the high probability high base state is a so-called "probability variable gaming state (also referred to as "probability variable mode")." In addition, in the high base state, if the 2R third jackpot occurs, the gaming state after the special game will be the high probability state of the special symbol and the special symbol's high probability state if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. It becomes a time saving state and a high base state. That is, the time-saving function and base state of the special symbol are the same as the state before the special game is executed. When playing the pachinko game machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal state with special symbols, a non-time saving state with special symbols, and a low base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state".

In addition, in a high base state such as a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the right game area 3B by hitting the ball to the right. In addition, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is opened more easily than in the low base state, and it is easier for the ball to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. This is because. Therefore, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is a trigger for determining whether the symbol is correct or not, the player performs a right hit to cause the game ball to enter the second starting port 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting pitches (opportunities for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) than by hitting left-handed. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing direction should be fired to the right gaming area.

On the other hand, in a low base state such as a high-probability low-base state or a low-probability low-base state, the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the left game area 3A by hitting the ball to the left. In addition, in the low base state, the second starting port 21 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and it is easier for the ball to enter the first starting port 20 than to enter the second starting port 21. This is because it has become. Therefore, in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 20, the player performs a left-handed hit. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting pitches (opportunities for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) than when hitting the ball to the right. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (displayed) controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing direction should be fired to the left gaming area. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs "yz", and indicates the firing direction by lighting the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the light should be emitted to the left gaming area by displaying "y□z□" (for example, □: off, ■: on), which turns off both LEDs. can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the light should be emitted to the right gaming area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control section) will be explained based on FIGS. 12 to 45. Note that the counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided in the main control board 80 reads out the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 12 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. . As shown in the figure, in the main control main processing, first, an initial setting processing to be described later is performed (S101). In the initial setting process (S101), for example, in addition to processing such as gaming state recovery processing and gaming state initialization processing, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO , PIO, and CTC (interrupt time controller), and reset various flags, status, and counters. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting process (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter (after the start of the game). In addition, in the examples and drawings, the ordinary pattern is referred to as "Public pattern", the special pattern as "Special pattern", the first special pattern as "Special pattern 1", "First special pattern", and the second special pattern as "Special pattern 2". It is sometimes called the ``Second Special Map''.

Further, following the initial setting process (S101), a mode setting process (S106) to be described later is executed. In this mode setting process, it is determined whether predetermined change conditions (change timing, change operation), which will be described later, are satisfied, and if the change conditions are satisfied, the setting is changed to the game mode selected by the mode setting switch 82. This is a process that makes it possible. In addition, during this mode setting process, it is determined whether predetermined confirmation conditions (confirmation timing, confirmation operation), which will be described later, are met, and if the confirmation conditions are met, the set gaming mode is displayed on the information display section 88. Performs mode confirmation processing to display and confirm. Similar to the initial setting process (S101), this mode setting process (S106) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter (after the start of the game).

Further, following the mode setting process (S106), a power-on notification process (S107), which will be described later, is executed. In this power-on notification process, notification is performed in different ways depending on whether the backed-up game state information has been initialized and whether the game mode setting has been changed upon power-on. This power-on notification process (S107), like the initial setting process (S101) and mode setting process (S106), is executed only once after the power is turned on, and thereafter (after the game starts) shall not be executed.

Further, following the power-on notification process (S107), it is determined whether the initialization flag is ON (S108), and if the initialization flag is ON, that is, the RAM is If it is determined that the stored gaming information has been initialized (erased) (RAM clear processing has been performed) (YES in S108), the initialization flag is turned OFF (S109) and the process moves to S110. On the other hand, if it is determined in S108 that the initialization flag is not ON, that is, the RAM clearing process has not been performed (NO in S108), the initialization flag is already OFF, so the process directly proceeds to S110. In S110, interrupts are enabled (S110), and the process moves to S102. This makes it possible to execute the interrupt process (S105), and if the gaming machine is in a gaming mode changing state or gaming mode confirmation state, the gaming machine ends that state and shifts to a gaming enabled state. Also, thereby, the display content of the information display section 88, which will be described later, is switched from information indicating the gaming mode to information indicating the base value. In addition, in S102, interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a period of 4 ms. Then, after the interrupt processing (S105) ends and until the next interrupt processing (S105) starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing (S103) is repeated. executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Initial setting process]
Next, the initial setting process (S101) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 13, in the initial setting process (S101), first, interrupts are prohibited (S3001), and a stack pointer setting process is performed to set a stack area for securing a stack area (S3002). Next, interrupt setting processing (S3003) to set the interrupt mode, built-in device setting processing to set various built-in devices such as CTC (counter timer circuit) and PIO (peripheral device interface) (S3004), and S3006 Shift to processing.

In S3006, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is ON, that is, whether a pressing operation is being performed (S3006). If it is determined in S3006 that the RAM clear switch is OFF, that is, the power was turned on without the RAM clear switch being operated (NO in S3006), then whether the power off flag is normally turned ON or not is determined. is determined (S3007). If it is determined in S3007 that the power-off flag is ON (YES in S3007), check data of the RAM is calculated regarding the backup area (161, 162) in the RAM (S3008). The RAM check data is calculated by adding the state of the input port, the value of the power-off flag, and the contents of the RAM area protected at the time of power-off, one byte at a time, and then inverting all bits.

Next, the check data calculated in S3008 is compared with the check data stored in the RAM at the time of power cutoff (also referred to as "power cutoff") to determine whether the check data is normal (S3009). . If it is determined in S3009 that the calculated RAM check data and the saved check data match (YES in S3009), it is determined that the backup data saved in the RAM backup area (161, 162) at power-off is normal. Then, it initializes (clears to 0) areas other than the RAM area (backup area, etc.) used when performing power restoration processing, and saves the game status (probability status, time saving status, number of pending games, game status) at the time of power outage. mode, special symbol status, normal symbol status, etc.) (S3010). Next, the power outage flag is turned OFF (S3011), and a "power-on command at power outage recovery (power outage recovery command)" is sent to the sub control board 90 (S3012), and the process ends. In addition, the "power failure recovery command" includes setting values depending on the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state, whether or not time is being reduced, status information, etc.), and the sub control board is activated based on this setting value. The control state 90 also returns to the control state at the time of the occurrence of the power interruption (before the occurrence of the power interruption).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3006 that the RAM clear switch is ON, that is, the power was turned on with the RAM clear switch being operated (the power was turned on while pressing RAM clear) (YES in S3006), Alternatively, if it is determined in S3007 that the power-off flag is not turned on normally (that is, it is OFF or abnormal) (NO in S3007), or if it is determined that the check data in the RAM does not match (S3009 (NO), the entire area (including the backup area) of the RAM (main control unit 80 and dispensing control unit RAM) is initialized (S3013), and unlike the above-mentioned "power-on command when recovering from power outage", A "power-on command when clearing the RAM (RAM clear command)" is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 (S3014) so that the initialization flag can be identified (S3015), and the process ends.

By performing this process, when the power switch is OFF, if you turn on the power switch while operating the RAM clear switch (leave it ON) and leave the RAM clear switch ON until a predetermined time, the RAM clear signal will be output. is transmitted to the main control board 80, and the entire RAM area including the backup area is initialized. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without such an operation, the gaming state (control state) at the time of power outage will be restored based on the gaming state information (including gaming mode) stored in the backup area. It will be done. As a result, even in the event of an unexpected power outage, it is possible to restore the gaming state (control state) during the game when the power supply is resumed, preventing players from suffering unexpected damage. It becomes possible to do so.

[Mode setting processing]
Next, the mode setting process (S106) will be explained using FIG. 14. In the mode setting process, the game mode before the power is turned off is changed to another game mode selected from the five types of game modes 1 to 5 described above (game mode change state), or the current game mode is set. This is a process of checking the set game mode (game mode confirmation state). In this mode setting process, specific changing conditions are set, and unless the changing conditions are met, the game mode setting cannot be changed even if the mode setting switch 82 is operated. Similarly, specific confirmation conditions are set, and unless the confirmation conditions are met, the setting of the gaming mode cannot be confirmed.

Specifically, in the mode setting process (S106), first, the initialization maintenance flag, setting change flag, and recovery flag are turned OFF (S3120), and the process moves to S3101. Through this process, if any of the initialization maintenance flag, setting change flag, and recovery flag is ON, it is turned OFF, and if it is already OFF, it remains OFF, and all of these flags are turned OFF. Then, through the process described later, only one flag is turned ON depending on the power-on mode. In S3101, it is determined whether the initialization flag is ON, that is, whether the RAM was initialized by operating the RAM clear switch when the power was turned on (S3101). If it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is ON (YES in S3101), then it is determined whether the mode setting key (mode setting lock) is ON (S3102). That is, the aforementioned setting key is inserted into the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock section 89, and it is determined whether the setting key is operated from the OFF position to the ON position. If it is determined that the mode setting key is not ON, that is, the setting key is not operated (not inserted) and the mode setting lock 89 is in the OFF state (NO in S3102), the backed up gaming state Turn on the initialization maintenance flag (also referred to as "first startup flag") indicating that the information has been erased (initialized) and the gaming mode settings have not been changed (the settings have been maintained) (S3111); Finish processing.

In this way, even if the backup area is initialized when the power is turned on to the game machine, if the mode setting lock section 89 is not turned on when the power is turned on, the game mode can be changed by simply initializing it. It is not possible to change the settings. Next, in S3102, when it is determined that the mode setting key is ON, that is, the setting key is inserted into the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock section 89, and the setting key is operated from the OFF position to the ON position. (YES in S3102), the process moves to S3103. This is done when the setting key is inserted into the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock part 89 with the power OFF, and with the setting key operated to the ON position, the power switch 84 is pressed while pressing the RAM clear switch 83. It shows the ON state. That is, this means that both the RAM clear switch 83 and the mode setting lock 89 were turned on when the power was turned on. In this embodiment, this is the gaming mode change condition. As a result, the gaming machine enters a "gaming mode change state" in which the gaming mode setting can be changed to any desired setting.

In S3103, it is determined whether the mode change flag indicating the "game mode change state" is ON (S3103), and if it is determined that the mode change flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the mode change flag is By turning it ON, the game mode is changed to a "game mode change state" (S3104), and the process moves to S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3103 that the mode change flag is already ON (YES in S3103), the process moves to S3105. In S3105, the selection information of the mode setting switch 82, which allows the player to arbitrarily operate and select any gaming mode, is read (S3105), and the gaming mode corresponding to the read selection information is set (S3106). The game mode set in S3106 is displayed on the information display section 88 (S3107), and the process moves to S3108. The display mode of the information display section 88 when displaying the game mode is such that the first information display section 88a, the second information display section 88b, and the third information display section 88c are all arranged in the center of seven segments. Only the segment is displayed by lighting, and the remaining segments and the dot display section are turned off. Then, the fourth information display section 88d at the right end is used to display a game mode. The display mode is one of [1], [2], [3], [4], and [5], and in the "gaming mode change state", slide the operation part 82a of the mode setting switch 82. For each game, information ([1], [2], [3], [4], or [5]) indicating the corresponding game mode is displayed. Further, the dot display section is turned off. For example, when game mode 3 is selected, the information display section displays [---3].

In S3108, it is determined whether the mode setting key is OFF, that is, the setting key inserted into the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock 89 is rotated from the ON position to the OFF position, and the mode setting lock 89 is in the OFF state. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S3108). That is, in the "game mode change state", it is determined whether the setting change operation for any game mode is completed and the operation to return the setting key to the OFF position (operation to end the "game mode change state") is performed. If it is determined in S3108 that the mode setting key is OFF, that is, the setting key is still in the OFF position (NO in S3108), the process returns to S3103 and the processes up to S3108 are performed again. As a result, the game store clerk, etc. can maintain the "gaming mode change state" until the setting key is operated to the OFF position (by keeping it in the ON position), and ensure that the game mode is set to the desired (intended) gaming mode. (change settings).

When the setting to an arbitrary (intended) game mode is completed, the setting key is operated (returned) to the OFF position to end the "game mode change state". Furthermore, once the "game mode change state" is completed, the gaming machine will remain in the "game mode change state" unless the power is turned off again and then turned on again in a manner that satisfies the specific change conditions. It is not possible. Also, the setting key was operated (returned) to the OFF position to end the "gaming mode change state", but instead of this, the setting key was operated (returned) to the OFF position and the setting key was turned off. The "gaming mode change state" may be ended by pulling it out from the insertion part 89a. Furthermore, even when the game mode is changed to a "game mode change state", the "game mode change state" may be ended without changing the game mode.

If it is determined in S3108 that the mode setting key is OFF, that is, the setting key has been operated to the OFF position (YES in S3108), the mode change flag is turned OFF and the "gaming mode change state" is ended (S3109). , the backed up gaming state information is erased (initialized) and the setting change flag (also referred to as "second startup flag") indicating that the gaming mode setting has been changed is turned ON (S3110), and the process is finished. . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game mode is not changed in the "game mode change state", the setting change flag is turned ON, but even if the setting change flag is changed to such a state and initialized, the setting change flag is turned ON. The game mode that was previously set may be stored (not deleted), and if the game mode is not changed in the "game mode change state", the initialization maintenance flag may be turned on.

If it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is not ON, that is, the backed up gaming state information has not been erased (initialized) (NO in S3101), it is assumed that the specific change conditions are not met, and the The process proceeds to step S3112 without changing the state to "status". In S3112, the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is read (S3112), and the selection information of the read mode selection switch and the game (currently being set) stored in the RAM by the recovery process of the initial setting process described above are used. Determine whether the mode and match (S3114). Next, in S3114, if it is determined that the results of the comparison determination in S3113 match (YES in S3114), then the process moves to S3116. In S3116, it is determined whether an error is being reported (S3116), and if it is determined that an error is not being reported (NO in S3116), the backed up gaming state information is restored (not initialized) (and the gaming mode settings A recovery flag (also referred to as a "third activation flag") indicating that the ``no change will be made'' is turned on (S3118), a mode confirmation process to be described later is performed (S3119), and the process ends.

That is, when the power is turned on, the gaming state (control state) at the time of power outage is restored based on the gaming state information stored and held in the backup area without performing a predetermined operation on the RAM clear switch, If the setting state of the mode setting switch is not changed, the processing order is as described above, and the game can be started without changing the game mode (without going through the "game mode change state").

Further, if it is determined in S3114 that the comparison determination result in S3113 does not match (NO in S3114), an error notification is performed (S3115) and the process returns to S3114. Then, the processes of S3114 and S3115 are repeated until it is determined that they match in S3114, and the error notification continues. Incidentally, until it is determined in S3114 that they match, the error notification will continue and the game will not be able to start. In other words, the game is in a stopped state. In this way, if it is determined in S3114 that they do not match, the gaming state (control state) at the time of power outage is restored based on the gaming state information stored in the backup area (playing state restoration process is performed in the initial setting process). ), and the setting state of the mode setting switch is changed (when the mode setting switch 82 is operated even though it is not in the "gaming mode change state"). In addition, for error notification, an error display indicating that "the mode setting switch has been illegally operated" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a predetermined error is displayed on the panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, or speaker 67. It is possible to make notifications. Further, in the error notification, both the correct game mode setting and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch may be shown by some kind of display. This makes it possible to quickly correct the setting position of the game mode by the mode setting switch 82 and end the error notification.

On the other hand, while the error notification is being executed, the setting state of the mode setting switch 82 is returned to the position corresponding to the gaming mode set in the gaming machine (the backed up gaming mode setting) (that is, the state at the time of power outage). As a result, it is determined in S3114 that they match (YES in S3114), and it is possible to proceed to the process in S3116. In S3116, it is determined whether error notification is being performed (S3116), and if it is determined that error notification is being performed (YES in S3116), error notification is ended (S3117) and the process moves to S3118. This makes it possible to start playing the game ("playable state"). Another method for terminating (cancelling) this error notification is to temporarily turn off the power switch, perform a predetermined input operation on the RAM clear switch, and then turn on the power switch. At this time, regardless of whether the setting key is operated or not, the error notification ends by initializing the error information. In addition, if you operate the setting key to the ON position with the power switch turned OFF, operate the RAM clear switch, and turn the power switch ON, the error notification will be terminated and the gaming mode will be changed to the mode setting. It becomes possible to change to the game mode corresponding to the selection information of the switch 82. This method also makes it possible to terminate the error notification (error processing).

In a pachinko game machine equipped with a game mode setting change function as in this embodiment, when a game machine slot is opened for maintenance or the like, a game clerk or a maintenance company may carelessly (erroneously) change the mode setting switch 82. There is a possibility that the mode setting switch may be operated unintentionally. In such a case, if you realize that you have operated by mistake, you can return to the original setting position, but there are cases where you do not realize that you have operated by mistake. Furthermore, there is a possibility that someone may illegally open the gaming machine slot and operate the mode setting switch 82. As a result, the game mode (selection information) indicated (selected) by the mode setting switch may be changed. In such cases, it is possible to change the game mode without any restrictions (even after the game has started), or to change the game mode by reading the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 without any special restrictions when the power is turned on. Then, the game mode may be changed to a game mode that the game parlor does not intend, or a game mode that is advantageous to fraudulent players may be changed, and the game parlor etc. may suffer an unexpected disadvantage. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, specific change conditions are set, and unless the change conditions are met, the mode setting switch 82 is operated to move the operating section 82a to a position where an arbitrary game mode can be set. Even if it is moved, the game mode corresponding to the position (selection information) will not be changed.

This makes it difficult to illegally change the gaming mode, and also prevents the gaming mode setting from being easily changed even if the mode setting switch 82 is operated by mistake. Further, the setting of the game mode can be changed only when the game machine is initialized when the power is turned on and the mode setting lock is turned on by operating the setting key at a specific time. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of fraud occurring. Specifically, if it is possible to change the gaming mode during a game or when the gaming state is restored, for example, in a low probability state, "gaming mode 3", which has the highest jackpot probability in the low probability state, ” and enters a high probability state, the setting is changed to “gaming mode 4” or “gaming mode 5” to increase the probability of jackpot occurrence in the high probability state and increase the continuation rate of the high probability state. Such fraud may occur. However, in this embodiment, in order to change the settings of the game mode, it is necessary to initialize the gaming machine (clear RAM). need to be in state. This prevents such fraud from occurring.

In this way, the timing to change the gaming mode is set to ``when the power is turned on (start of power supply),'' and the gaming mode can only be changed ``when the gaming machine is initialized and the setting key is operated in a specified manner.'' What you have done, etc. can be called "game mode change conditions." In addition, since the game mode can only be changed in the process (mode setting process) performed during the period after the power is turned on and before the start of the game, the game mode can be changed from the initial state (for example, high probability state, high base state). It is not possible to change the game mode in the game mode, time saving mode, jackpot game, or while the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner.

[Mode confirmation process]
Next, mode confirmation processing (S3119) for confirming the game mode being set will be explained using FIG. 15. In the mode confirmation process (S3119), first, it is checked whether the mode setting key is ON, that is, whether the backed up gaming state information has been restored without erasing (initializing) it, and whether the mode setting lock section 89 is in the ON state. Determine (S5001). If it is determined in S5001 that the mode setting key is ON (YES in S5001), then the process moves to S5002. That is, when the power is OFF, insert the setting key into the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock 89 and rotate it from the OFF position to the ON position, and without turning on the RAM clear switch (initialization operation). This is the case when the power is turned on. In this case, the gaming machine is placed in a "gaming mode confirmation state" on the assumption that the specific confirmation condition is satisfied.

In S5002, it is determined whether the mode confirmation flag indicating that the set gaming mode is in the "gaming mode confirmation state" is ON (S5002), and if it is determined that the mode confirmation flag is not ON. (NO in S5002), the mode confirmation flag is turned ON to set the "gaming mode confirmation state", and the process moves to S5004. If it is determined in S5002 that the mode confirmation flag is ON, that is, it has already been set to the "gaming mode confirmation state" (YES in S5002), the process moves to S5004. In S5004, the game mode currently being set (stored in the backup area) is read (S5004), and then the read game mode is displayed on the information display section 88 (S5005), and the mode setting key is turned OFF. (S5006)

In addition, when displaying the currently set gaming mode on the information display section 88, information corresponding to the gaming mode is displayed on the fourth information display section 88d at the right end using display control similar to that described above. do. Furthermore, the display control for the other information display units (88a, 88b, 88c) is also the same as described above. If it is determined in S5001 that the mode setting key is not OFF, that is, it is still in the "gaming mode confirmation state" (NO in S5006), the process returns to S5002 and the processes up to S5006 are performed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5006 that the mode setting key is OFF, that is, the gaming store clerk has rotated the setting key to the OFF position after confirming the gaming mode (YES in S5006), the mode confirmation flag is turned OFF. to end the "gaming mode confirmation state" (S5007) and end the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5001 that the mode setting key is not ON (NO in S5001), the process ends without generating the "gaming mode confirmation state". Further, when it is determined that the mode setting key is ON without being initialized, a display unit such as an LED may be used to notify that the "gaming mode confirmation state" has been set. Similarly, when the "game mode change state" is set, a notification indicating that the game mode change state is set may be provided. Then, these notifications are terminated based on the transition to the game-enabled state. As a result, a game store clerk or the like can easily understand whether the state of the game machine is set to the "game mode change state" or the "game mode confirmation state."

As mentioned above, the timing for checking the gaming mode is set to ``when the power is turned on (starting power supply),'' and the timing for checking the gaming mode is set to ``when the gaming machine is not initialized and the setting key is operated in a specified manner.'' It is possible to call this "game mode confirmation condition". In addition, since it is possible to check the game mode only during the process (mode setting process) that is performed during the period after the power is turned on and before the game starts, it is possible to check the game mode while playing the game (in the middle of playing the game). I can't. As a result, a player (unauthorized player) may check the gaming mode of a gaming machine during a game and fraudulently select a gaming machine with a high setting (for example, gaming mode 3) that is advantageous to the player and play the game. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of such problems as much as possible.

[Power-on notification processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a power-on notification process (S107) for notifying which mode of the plurality of power-on modes described above was used to turn on the power will be described. In the power-on notification process (S107), first, it is determined whether the initialization maintenance flag is ON, that is, whether the flag indicating the power-on mode (startup mode) turned ON in the mode setting process (S106) is the initialization maintenance flag. Determine (S5101). If it is determined in S5101 that the initialization maintenance flag is ON (YES in S5101), the power-on mode indicated by the initialization maintenance flag is [the gaming state information is initialized, and the gaming mode settings are not changed. Notification is performed in the "first notification mode (first start-up notification mode)" corresponding to the fact that the notification mode is not activated (S5102), and the process proceeds to S5103.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5101 that the initialization maintenance flag is not ON (NO in S5101), then it is determined whether the setting change flag is ON, that is, the power-on mode (startup mode) turned ON in the mode setting process (S106). It is determined whether the flag indicating the mode) is a setting change flag (S5105). If it is determined in S5105 that the setting change flag is ON (YES in S5105), the power-on mode indicated by the setting change flag is [the gaming state information has been initialized and the gaming mode setting has been changed] A notification is made in the corresponding "second notification mode (second start-up notification mode)" (S5106), and then a setting change command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 (S5108), and the process moves to S5103. Note that the setting change command is transmitted when [the gaming state information has been initialized and the setting of the gaming mode has been changed (setting changed state)]. In addition, the sub-control unit 90 that has received the setting change command uses the notification unit (effect symbol display unit, board lamp, speaker, etc.) controlled by the sub-control unit 90 to notify that the settings of the game mode have been changed. show. Note that the notifications (S5102, S5106, S5107) in this power-on notification process are executed by the notification means (display unit) controlled by the main control unit 80. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5105 that the setting change flag is not ON (NO in S5105), it is determined that the flag indicating the power-on mode (startup mode) turned ON in the mode setting process (S106) is the recovery flag. , the "third notification mode (at the third startup time Notification is performed in "Notification mode" (S5107), and the process moves to S5103.

Here, "first notification mode (notification mode at first startup)", "second notification mode (notification mode at second startup)", and "third notification mode (notification mode at third startup)" are respectively There are different notification modes, and a person who comes into contact with (sees) these notification modes can check whether the power-on mode (startup mode) that he or she performed is as intended (game mode change). This makes it possible to check whether the data has been initialized or not. In addition, the first notification mode, second notification mode, and third notification mode are the display modes (display characters, display characters, display color, light emitting color, blinking speed, lighting time, etc.) performed on the LED, liquid crystal display, etc. It can be different. Furthermore, the sounds (type of sound, volume) output from the speakers can be different. Further, these multiple elements may be executed in combination or individually. Further, a plurality of elements may be different from other notification modes, or only one element may be different from other notification modes.

Furthermore, these notification modes may be executed only on the display section provided on the back side of the gaming machine, and not on the display section provided on the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the game mode setter such as a game clerk can confirm the power-on mode, but it can be made difficult for others, for example, the player, to confirm the power-on mode. Further, the notification may be provided by a plurality of notification sections provided on the back side of the gaming machine and the front side of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to more reliably confirm whether the power-on mode (startup mode) performed by the device itself is as intended. Alternatively, the notification may be made only by the notification section provided on the front side of the gaming machine.

In addition, any of the "first notification mode (first startup notification mode)", "second notification mode (second startup notification mode)", and "third notification mode (third startup notification mode)" It is provided with a counting means (time measuring means) for counting (timekeeping) the notification time after starting the notification. In S5103, it is determined whether the specific notification time has elapsed based on the value of the counting means (timekeeping means) (S5103), and if it is determined that the specific notification time has not elapsed (NO in S5103), S5103 The process returns to and performs the determination again until the specific notification time is reached (S5103). If it is determined in S5103 that the specific notification time has elapsed (YES in S5103), the notification in progress is ended (S5104) and the process ends. In this embodiment, the specific notification time is set to about 10 seconds. In this way, the notification mode when the power is turned on differs depending on the power-on mode (whether or not initialization has been performed, whether settings have been changed or not), so game store staff, etc. It is possible to check whether it is the case.

In addition, if initialization (RAM clear) is performed, an initialization notification will be made; if initialization is not performed, no initialization notification will be made; even if initialization is performed, when changing the settings of the gaming mode, The format of the initialization notification may be changed depending on whether the initialization notification is performed or not (first initialization notification, second initialization notification).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 17, in the interrupt processing (S105), output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, payout control board 110, etc. do. The commands and the like outputted here include information regarding the gaming state, the result of special symbol validity determination, symbols as jackpot types, fluctuation patterns, and the like. Note that the command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the contents of the command.

In the input process (S202) that is performed next to the output process (S201), various sensors attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (first starting opening sensor 20a, second starting opening sensor 21a, first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the general ball entering hole sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. Further, a detection signal from a lower tray full detection sensor that detects whether the lower tray 62 is full is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as lower tray full data.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. This is done both during the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started).

Following the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S203), the base display processing (S212) described later, the starting port sensor detection processing (S204) described later, the regular symbol operation processing (S205), and the special symbol operation processing (S206) , a specific area sensor detection process (S207), a start ball entry process (S208), a power-off monitoring process (S209), and a mode setting monitoring process (S210). Thereafter, other processing (S210) not deeply related to the present invention is executed, and the interrupt processing (S105) is ended. Then, the processing of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80, and when the interrupt pulse is input (about 4 ms later), the interrupt processing is performed again. (S105) is executed. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the commands etc. set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Base display processing]
Next, using FIG. 17, the base display process (S212 ) will be explained. A game ball is fired into the game area 3, and when the fired game ball enters a ball entry port (winning port) such as the first starting port 20, second starting port 21, or general ball entry port 27, the ball enters the game area 3. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player for each bet (gaming profits are awarded). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3, a large number of game nails 16 are provided in the game area 3 to change the downward direction of the game ball, and depending on the arrangement and angle (orientation) of the game nails 16, the direction to the ball entrance can be changed. The entry rate of game balls will change.

Furthermore, gaming machines installed in gaming parlors are inspected by a predetermined third-party inspection organization, and only gaming machines that pass the inspection are recognized as proper gaming machines and can be installed in gaming parlors. Furthermore, this inspection target also includes a base value, and it is necessary that the game be executed with an appropriate base value. However, the higher the base value (the higher the rate of ball entry into the entry hole), the more advantageous it is to the player, so some game parlors adjust the angle (orientation) of the game nail 16 so that the ball enters the entry hole. There were cases where the ball entry rate decreased. If such an adjustment is made, the installed gaming machine will have a performance different from that of the gaming machine that passed the inspection, which is not appropriate.

Therefore, the game machine of this embodiment is provided with the above-mentioned out sensor 29 to count the number (total number) of game balls fired into the game area, and also count the game balls paid out as prize balls. The base value of the gaming machine is calculated and displayed. The base values of this embodiment include a first base value and a second base value, and the "first base value" is the total number of balls fired (number of outs) stored for calculating the first base value. ), the total number of prize balls stored for calculating the first base value, and the base value (real-time base value) for the entire period (excluding high base state and jackpot game). period base value). In addition, the "second base value" includes the number of balls fired during the special period (the number of outs during the special period) stored for calculating the second base value in a predetermined special period, and the number of balls fired during the special period (number of outs during the special period) stored for calculating the second base value. This shows the number of balls awarded during the special period and the base value (fixed period base value) of the special period.

More specifically, the second base value is calculated by "total number of prize balls in the relevant period/5000" every time the total number of game balls fired reaches 5000. The second base value is updated every time the total number of fired balls reaches 5000. Therefore, in a gaming machine that starts a game for the first time, the second base value is not displayed until the total number of balls fired reaches 5000. Specifically, until the first second base value is calculated, "b2. --'' is displayed. In addition, the calculated first base value and second base value are displayed on the information display section 88, and this information display section 88 is displayed when the gaming machine is powered on and is in the "playable state". , the base value (first base value or second base value) is always displayed. The main control board 80 is equipped with a display changeover switch (not shown) for switching the display content of the base value on the information display section 88 to the first base value or the second base value. In this base display state (playable state), by operating the display changeover switch, it becomes possible to switch the display content displayed on the information display section 88 to the first base value or the second base value.

Furthermore, the display mode of the base value in the information display section 88 is such that the information indicating which base value is displayed and the base value up to the second decimal place can be displayed. Incidentally, in order to establish a game parlor business, the base value (number of prize balls/number of fired balls) is usually smaller than "1". The specific display mode will be explained below. For example, assume that the first base value is "0.25" and the second base value is "0.26" at a predetermined timing. When displaying the first base value, the 7-segment display parts of the first information display part 88a and the second information display part 88b are used to display "b1", and the second information display part 88b is lit. Light up the dot display to indicate the decimal point. Then, the 7-segment display sections of the third information display section 88c and the fourth information display section 88d are used to display numerical values below the decimal point. As a result, "b1.25" is displayed on the information display section 88. Since this first base value is a base value that changes in real time, it changes in real time to "b1.26" or "b1.24" depending on the increase in the prize ball ratio and the increase in the out ratio. The base value shall be calculated by rounding to the third decimal place. Furthermore, the display mode of the second base value displayed by operating a predetermined changeover switch is also the same as that of the first base value, and specifically, "b2.26" is displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a new second base value is calculated every time 5,000 fired balls are counted, and the base value displayed as the second base value is updated. In other words, when the total number of balls fired is from 0 to 4999, "second base value: not displayed" is displayed, and when the total number of balls fired is from 5000 to 9999, "second base value: base value for the period from 1 to 5000" is displayed. When the total number of balls fired is from 10,000 to 14,999, the second base value is updated to the base value for the period from 5,001 to 10,000, and so on.

In this embodiment, only the most recently calculated second base value is displayed, but in addition to this aspect, a third base value, a fourth base value, a fifth base value, etc. are provided. , these base values may be displayed by operating a predetermined changeover switch. The second base value is stored as a past second base value every time it is updated, the previous second base value is set as the third base value, and the second base value two times before is set as the fourth base value. It is also possible to display the second base value three times earlier as the fifth base value, and so on in order. This allows past second base values to be checked (inspected) as well.

The first base value is calculated in real time each time the out sensor 29 detects a shot ball (out ball) and each time a prize ball is paid out, and if there is a change in the second decimal place or higher, The display will be updated each time. In addition, as another aspect, regarding the first base value, there is a large error (the value is not stable) due to accidental consecutive balls entering immediately after the game starts, so the total number of balls fired (total number of outs) is smaller than the number of specific balls. (for example, 200), the calculated value (first base value) may not be shown (displayed). For example, until a specific pitch count is reached, only the center of the 7-segment display sections of the third information display section 88c and the fourth information display section 88d may be displayed blinking. Specifically, “b1. --'' is displayed. Then, the first base value calculated when the total number of fired balls reaches 200 may be displayed (for example, "b1.35").

In addition, these base values, such as the first base value and the second base value (including the third base value, the fourth base value, etc.), and data for calculating the base value (number of fired balls counted, number of prize balls, etc.) (count values, etc.) are to be backed up in the event of a power outage and are stored in a specific backup area. Furthermore, since the base-related information stored in this specific backup area is used for inspection and confirmation, it is not subject to initialization using a RAM clear switch or the like. Therefore, this base related information is information that will not be deleted even if the gaming machine is initialized.

In addition, as another aspect, it is impossible to initialize these base related information without opening the main control board storage case that houses the main control board 80. Initialization may be possible by opening the package and operating a switch or the like provided inside. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the base value or the like, it is possible to initialize (reset) the main control board storage case by opening the main control board storage case after undergoing an inspection. In addition, since the main control board storage case requires the destruction of some parts when the package is opened (because it is configured so that it can be recognized that the package has been opened), if base-related information is fraudulently deleted, The act is recognizable. This makes it possible to prevent fraud.

Furthermore, it may be possible to output information indicating these base values (first base value, second base value, etc.) from a predetermined external terminal to a hall computer or the like connected to the external terminal. This makes it possible for the hall computer to easily recognize an abnormality in the base value. In addition, the hall computer manages the multiple base values (first base value, second base value, etc.) received, and uses the base abnormality determination means provided in the hall computer to detect abnormalities in multiple (all) base values. If it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, it becomes possible to notify the occurrence of the abnormality. Abnormality notifications can be made by displaying a base error on the display unit connected to the hall computer (liquid crystal, LED, lamp, etc.), or by displaying a base error on an external lamp provided for each gaming machine. It is possible to display the information in a manner that indicates that some kind of error has occurred, or to output an error sound from a speaker. Of course, when such a base error occurs, the error display or error sound may be output from not only the display unit connected to the hall computer but also the display unit and speakers included in the gaming machine. As a result, when a base error occurs, the gaming parlor side can quickly notice the occurrence of the error and prevent unexpected disadvantages from occurring as much as possible.

In the base display process (S212), first, it is determined whether or not the time is being reduced (S5201), and if it is determined that the time is not being reduced (NO in S5201), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is being played (S5202). If it is determined in S5202 that there is no jackpot (S5202), the process moves to S5203. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5201 that the time is being reduced (YES in S5201), and if it is determined in S5202 that the jackpot game is in progress (YES in S5202), the calculation of the first base value and the second base value ( The process proceeds to step S5209 without updating). This means that the first base value and the second base value are the number of out balls (number of fired balls) and prize balls that occurred when the gaming state was in a low base state (specific period) excluding during time saving and jackpot games. The calculation is based on numbers. That is, the first base value and the second base value are values indicating the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of out balls (number of fired balls) in the normal gaming state (low base state), and the number of out balls during time saving and jackpot games. The number of pitches (number of fired pitches) and the number of prize pitches are not used as data for calculating the first base value and the second base value.

In S5203, it is determined whether an out ball has been detected, that is, whether the out sensor 29 has detected a game ball (S5203), and if it is determined that the out sensor 29 has detected a game ball (YES in S5203), The detected values are added to calculate (update) the first base value and the second base value (including the value for updating to the new second base value) (S5204), and the calculated value is It is stored (S5205), and the process moves to S5206. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5203 that the game ball is not detected by the out sensor 29 (NO in S5203), the process proceeds to S5206 without updating the number of out balls. S5203 to S5205 are processes for updating the number of out pitches when calculating the first base value and the second base value.

S5206 determines whether or not a prize ball has been paid out (S5206), and if it is determined that a prize ball has been paid out (YES in S5206), the number of prize balls that have been paid out is added and the first Calculate (update) the base value and the second base value (including the value for updating to the new second base value) (S5207), store the calculated value (S5208), and proceed to the process of S5209. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5206 that no prize balls have been paid out (NO in S5206), the process proceeds to S5209 without updating the number of prize balls. S5206 to S5208 are processes for updating the number of prize balls when calculating the first base value and the second base value.

In S5209, the setting of the information display section 88, that is, which base value (first base value or second base value) the information display section 88 is set to display using the changeover switch is read (S5209), and the corresponding The updated base value according to the settings is displayed on the information display section 88 (S5210), and the process ends. This makes it possible to update the base value to be displayed at a timing corresponding to each base value, and when the base value is updated, the updated base value can be displayed on the information display section 88. .

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the starting port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). . If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal symbol reserved balls (the number of regular symbols reserved, specifically the value of the counter that counts the number of regular symbols reserved) is It is determined whether the number is 4 or more (S302), and if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If the number of normal symbols pending is 4 or more (YES in S302), proceed to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbols reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal symbols reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label -TRND-H) of the random number counter for normal symbol validity judgment stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is obtained, and the obtained random number value is (Acquired information) is stored in an address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls in the regular symbol reserved storage section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S305). If no game ball enters the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, but if a game ball enters the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the special The number of 2 reserved balls (the number of 2nd special symbols reserved, specifically the value of the counter that counts the number of 2nd special symbols reserved in the RAM of the main control unit 80) reaches 4 (the upper limit number) It is determined whether there is one (S306). If the number of reserved balls for special map 2 has reached 4 (YES in S306), proceed to S309, but if the number of reserved balls for special map 2 is less than 4 (NO in S306), Add 1 to the number of reserved balls for special map 2 (S307).

Subsequently, special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for determining the validity of special symbols (label -TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area of the RAM (not shown), the random number for determining the jackpot type Obtain the value of the counter (label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (that is, the random number shown in FIG. 8(A) ), and stores these obtained random values (obtained information) in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls in the second special figure reservation storage section 85b.

Subsequently, in the starting port sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 20, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a (S309). ). If no game ball enters the first starting port 20 (NO in S309), the process ends, but if a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (YES in S309), the special When the number of 1 reserved balls (the number of 1st special symbols reserved, specifically the value of the counter that counts the number of 1st special symbols reserved in the RAM of the main control unit 80) reaches 4 (the upper limit number) It is determined whether there is one (S310). Then, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S310), the process ends, but if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), Add "1" to the number of reserved balls for special map 1 (S311).

Subsequently, special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), similarly to the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol validity determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (Label-TRND-A), value of random number counter for jackpot type determination (label-TRND-AS), value of reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and value of fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (that is, acquire the random values shown in FIG. 8(A)), and store these acquired random values in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls in the first special figure reservation storage section 85a. .

[General figure movement processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal figure operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 20 following the starting port sensor detection process (S204). In the normal pattern movement processing (S205), the processing regarding the normal pattern display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal pattern movement status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . Then, if the "common pattern movement status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal pattern standby process (S402) is performed, and if the "common pattern movement status" is "2" (S401 NO in S403, YES in S403), perform the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), and if the "Normal pattern movement status" is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. Processing (S406) is performed, and if the "normal figure action status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. In addition, the general drawing operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the normal symbol standby process (S402), it is first determined whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is "0" (YES in S501). Finish this process. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), a normal symbol validity determination process to be described later is performed (S502). Further, following the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection process, with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8(E), if the gaming state is the time saving state, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern with a normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second is selected. do. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time saving state, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is 30 seconds is selected. Further, following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, a normal symbol random number shift process (S504), which will be described later, is performed. Further, following the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), a normal symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol variation start process, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". In the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbols.

[Normal symbol validity determination process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination stored in the regular symbol reservation storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON (that is, whether the gaming state is in the time saving state) (S602). In S602, if it is determined that the time-saving flag is ON, that is, the time-saving state is determined (YES in S602), the table for the time-saving state (the hit judgment value is It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the high-probability normal pattern validity determination based on "0" to "239" (S604), and the process moves to S605. That is, it is determined whether the read value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values. On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the time saving flag is not ON, that is, the non-time saving state is determined (NO in S602), the table for the non-time saving state (of the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8(D)) It is determined whether or not it is a hit by low probability normal pattern correctness judgment based on the hit judgment value "0", "1") (S603), and the process moves to S605.
Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal pattern correctness determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal pattern hit) or not (S605). A normal symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (ordinary figure hit) in S605 (YES at S605), the winning ordinary symbol (ordinary figure per symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the ordinary figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), the process ends.

[Normal pattern random number shift processing]
Next to the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) is executed. As shown in FIG. 23, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbols reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each common symbol reservation in the common symbol reservation storage unit is shifted by one position from the current position to the side from which it is read (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest level of pending memory in the general pattern holding storage section, is made empty ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth pending general pattern is cleared to 0 (S703 ), the process ends. In this way, the reservations for common maps are cleared in the order of reservation.

[Normal symbol fluctuation processing]
As shown in FIG. 24, in the normal symbol variation process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the process ends. On the other hand, if it has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), and the normal symbol movement status is set to "3" (S803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the fluctuating display of the normal symbol at the display result (normal symbol winning or normal symbol missing) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining the validity of the normal symbol (S804), this processing finish.

[Normal pattern confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If the ordinary figure flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the normal map per flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the time saving state is in progress (S902). If it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable prize winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). The opening pattern during the time saving state is, as described above, an opening pattern in which opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened is set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S902), the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable prize winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). The opening pattern during the non-time saving state is, as described above, an opening pattern in which opening is performed once for 0.2 seconds. Therefore, the second starting port opening counter is set to "1". Then, following the setting of the opening pattern (S903, S906), the normal figure action status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is finished.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the normal electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure per end flag is ON (S1001). The common symbol winning end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a winning result. If the normal pattern hit end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether the timing for opening the second starting port 21 has come (S1003), and if it has not been opened (NO in S1003), the process is finished and the process is completed. If so, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not the timing for closing the second starting port 21 has come (that is, after opening the second starting port 21, a predetermined timing is determined). It is determined (S1005) whether or not the set opening time has elapsed, and if it has not (NO in S1005), the process is finished, and if it has (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed). (S1006).

Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0" or not. (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is finished in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), a normal pattern per end process is performed to end the auxiliary game (S1009), and a normal pattern per end flag is set (S1010) to end the process. The second starting port opening counter becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times during the time saving state, and becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times. When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the end flag per normal pattern is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 has been completed the number of times set in S903 or S906, so the normal pattern per At the same time as turning off the end flag (S1011), turning off the ordinary figure per flag (S1012), and setting the ordinary figure operation status to "1" (S1013), the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 20).

[Special figure movement processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the special pattern movement process (S206) following the normal pattern movement process (S205). In the special figure operation process (S206), as shown in FIG. "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage. Then, if the "special pattern movement status" is "1" (YES in S1101), special pattern standby processing (S1102) is performed, and if the "special pattern movement status" is "2" (S1101 (NO in S1103, YES in S1103), special symbol fluctuation processing (S1104) is performed, and if the "special symbol movement status" is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105), the special symbol is confirmed. Processing (S1106) is performed, and if the "special figure operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), special electric accessory processing 1 as a jackpot game (S1108) When the "special figure operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) as a small winning game is performed. In addition, the special figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 28, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (i.e., the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2) is "0" (S1201) . If the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value obtained due to the ball entering the second starting port 21, the first starting It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (namely, the number of reserved balls on special map 1) is "0" (S1206). If the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the first starting port 20, the image It is determined whether or not the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is being processed as a standby screen (demonstration screen for waiting for customers is being executed) (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), the process is finished, Otherwise (NO in S1211), a standby screen setting process is executed to display a standby screen (S1212).

If the number of reserved balls for special map 2 is not "0" in S1201 (NO in S1201), that is, if there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the second starting port 21, , special figure 2 validity determination process (S1202), special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), and special figure 2 variation start process (S1205), which will be described later, are performed in this order. In addition, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second starting port 21 is There is no memory, but if there is memory of one or more random number counter values obtained due to the ball entering the first starting port 20, the special figure 1 validity judgment process (S1207) described later, the special figure 1 fluctuation Pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order. As described above, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is performed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0" (YES in S1201). That is, the extinguishment of the second special symbol reservation (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed with priority over the extinguishment of the first special symbol retention (fluctuating display of the first special symbol). In the first embodiment, the validity determination based on the second special symbol reservation is more likely to result in a jackpot that is profitable for the player than the validity determination based on the first special symbol reservation.

[Special figure 2 validity judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 2 validity judgment process (S1202), first, as a judgment value, the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage section 85b of the RAM (that is, the first piece of the second special figure reservation) is The value (label -TRND-A) of the special symbol validity judgment random number counter (oldest memory) stored in the corresponding RAM area is read out (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON, that is, whether or not the state is in a high probability state (S1302). If it is not a high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is a normal state, a normal Judgment is made based on the state jackpot judgment table (jackpot judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1303). On the other hand, if it is a high probability state (YES in S1302), a jackpot determination table for a high probability state corresponding to the set gaming mode (for example, gaming mode 2) from the jackpot determination table (FIG. 9(A)) Judgment is made based on the following (S1307). In the jackpot judgment table for high probability states, the jackpot judgment values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503". Also, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if the game mode is set to another game mode other than game mode 2, based on the jackpot determination table corresponding to the set game mode shown in FIG. Judgment shall be made as to whether or not it is correct. The jackpot determination value at that time is also as shown in FIG.

If the result of the jackpot determination (S1303, S1309) is determined to be a "jackpot" (YES in S1304), the value of the random number counter for jackpot type determination (label -TRND-AS) is read out and the value set as shown in FIG. 10 is read out. The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table corresponding to the game mode (S1310), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1311), and the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1312). ), the process ends. In addition, in the case of judgment regarding the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the judgment regarding the second special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. Further, if it is determined that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a jackpot, one of the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, and the 2R third jackpot is executed. Furthermore, if it is determined that the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is a jackpot in the determination of whether or not the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is a jackpot, it is determined as a 15R fourth jackpot (FIG. 8(B)).

Further, the jackpot flag includes a long hit flag that is turned on when the type of jackpot is a 15R first jackpot or a 15R second jackpot, and a short hit flag that is turned on when it is a 2R third jackpot. Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of two LEDs, a 2R lamp and a 15R lamp, and when the 2R third jackpot is reached and the short hit flag is turned on, the 2R third jackpot symbol is displayed. At the timing when is displayed as confirmed, the 2R lamp will be displayed lit. Specifically, the display mode is "2R▲15R△" (for example, ▲: lights on, △: lights off). Also, when the long hit flag is turned on due to any of the 15R 1st jackpot, 15R 2nd jackpot, and 15R 4th jackpot, the 15R lamp lights up at the timing when the corresponding jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Is displayed. Specifically, the display mode is "2R△15R▲".

On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination (S1303, S1307) is not a "jackpot" (NO in S1304), the small hit determination table corresponding to the set gaming mode (for example, gaming mode 2) is It is determined whether or not it is a small hit using a small hit determination table for small wins (S1305). That is, in the case of game mode 2, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol validity determination random number counter (label -TRND-A) matches any of the small hit determination values "101" to "105". (Figure 9). Then, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (NO in S1305), a missed symbol is determined (S1308) and the process ends. If it is determined that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), the small winning symbol is determined (S1306), the small winning flag is turned ON (S1306), and the process is finished. Incidentally, a random number for determining whether or not it is a small hit may be provided separately from the random number for determining the validity of the special symbol.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 28), after the special symbol 2 validity determination process (S1202), the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is a time saving state (whether the time saving flag is ON or not) (S1401). Then, if it is not in a time-saving state (NO in S1401), that is, in a non-time-saving state, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (S1402), and if it is ON (YES in S1402), it is a jackpot in a non-time-saving state. A fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the fluctuation pattern table (part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the non-time saving state and jackpot) (S1403) . Note that once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Further, in the first embodiment, the table for jackpots in the non-time-saving state is divided depending on whether the jackpot is a long hit (15R jackpot) or a short hit (2R jackpot). However, since this process is a variation pattern selection process for the special figure 2, there is only the 15R fourth jackpot (long hit) in the jackpot won in the lottery of the special figure 2. Therefore, the location referred to in this process is always the long winning location, and the variation pattern P1 or the variation pattern P2 is selected. Incidentally, the table for jackpots in the non-time saving state does not need to be divided into long wins and short wins. This also applies to the table for jackpot during the time saving state, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is determined whether the small hit flag is ON (S1405). Then, if the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1405), the table for small and medium winnings in the non-time-saving state (the part corresponding to the non-time-saving state and small winnings in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to, and the fluctuation A variation pattern is selected based on the pattern random number counter value (S1409). Specifically, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern P4 is always selected.

Further, if the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1405), it is determined whether the reach random number counter value (label -TRND-RC) is a reach establishment random number (S1406). As shown in FIG. 8(C), the reach establishment random number is "0" to "5" in the time saving state, and is "0" to "13" in the non-time saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, it is harder to reach when the ball misses than in the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the processing speed of special map reservations by allowing more non-reach effects with short fluctuation times to be selected in the time-saving state.

If the reach random number counter value (label -TRND-RC) is the random value of the reach establishment (YES in S1406), that is, if the reach is successful or not, the reach random number counter value (label -TRND-RC) is the reach establishment random value (YES in S1406), that is, if the reach is successful or not A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value by referring to the part of the pattern table that corresponds to the non-time-saving state and the reach/out-of-reach state (S1407). In the first embodiment, variation pattern P5 or P6 is selected.

If the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is not a random value that establishes a reach (NO in S1406), that is, if the reach is not missed, the reach random number counter value (label -TRND-RC) is not reached, in other words, if the reach is not missed, the reach is not missed during the non-time saving state (the fluctuation pattern shown in Figure 11). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1408) by referring to the part of the table that corresponds to a non-time-saving state and a reach-free state. When the ball is out of reach, a shortening variation function is activated according to the number of balls held. That is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "3" or "4", a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is selected compared to when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0" to "2". It is now possible to do so. In the first embodiment, variation pattern P7 or P8 is selected.

In addition, if it is determined in S1401 that the gaming state is in the time-saving state (YES in S1401), as shown in FIG. Processing (S1410 to S1416) is performed in the same flow as steps S1402 to S1609 above, except for setting the part of the table that corresponds to the time saving state). In other words, if it is a jackpot, refer to the part in the time saving state and corresponding to the jackpot in Fig. 11, if it is a small hit, refer to the part in the time saving state in Fig. 9 and corresponding to the small hit, and if it is reach or miss. Based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value by referring to the part corresponding to the time saving state in FIG. to select the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the variation pattern table during the time saving state (the part of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the time saving state), the shortening variation function according to the number of balls held when the reach is not missed is set to the number of balls held "2". ～It works when it is "4". In other words, the shortening variation is more likely to be selected than during the non-time saving state. Further, when a long hit is won among the jackpots, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than during a non-time saving state. In other words, the variation pattern table during the time saving state is such a table that the average value of the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than the variation pattern table during the non-time saving state.

After selecting a variation pattern as described above, other processing (S1404) shown in FIG. 30 is performed and this processing is completed. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 through output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage section 85b is set to one level lower (for example, when the second special figure reservation storage section 85b consists of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003") , address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, set "0" in the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage section 85b, that is, (if the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation. The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process ends.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) of FIG. 28 is executed. In the special figure 2 variation start process (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started. In the special symbol standby process (S1102) in FIG. 28, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "0" and the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), , special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207), special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and special figure 1 variation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special figure 1 validity judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207), processing (S1601 to S1609) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 validity determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to special figure 1, in S1601, the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage section 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first piece of the first special figure reservation) is Read out the stored random number counter value (label -TRND-A) for special symbol validity determination. In addition, in determining the type of jackpot in S1608, there is a possibility that it will be determined as any of the 15R first jackpot, 15R second jackpot, and 2R third jackpot (FIG. 10). As shown in the column of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in FIG. 10, the distribution rate of each jackpot is determined by the game mode. If it is determined to be a 15R first jackpot or a 15R second jackpot in this jackpot type determination, a long hit flag is turned ON as a jackpot flag in step S1609. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a 2R third jackpot, a short hit flag is turned on as a jackpot flag in S1609.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208) follows the same flow as the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 (S1701 to S1720). )I do. Therefore, a detailed explanation of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to special drawing 1, if YES in S1702 (that is, the jackpot flag is ON), the type of jackpot will be changed to 15R jackpot (either 15R 1st jackpot or 15R 2nd jackpot). (S1703). If it is a 15R jackpot (YES in S1703), the variation pattern is A fluctuation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1704). Specifically, variation pattern P1 or variation pattern P2 is selected.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1703 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S1703), that is, if it is a 2R third jackpot, the table for 2R jackpot in a non-time saving state (of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 11, in a non-time saving state and A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1706). Specifically, variation pattern P3 is selected.

In addition, in this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, even if S1712 is YES (that is, the jackpot flag is ON), the type of jackpot is 15R jackpot (either 15R 1st jackpot or 15R 2nd jackpot). It is determined whether or not (S1713). If it is a 15R jackpot (YES in S1713), refer to the table for 15R jackpot during the time saving state (the part of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. A variation pattern is selected based on the value (S1714). Specifically, one of the variation patterns P9 to P11 is selected.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1713 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S1713), that is, if it is a 2R third jackpot, the table for 2R jackpot during the time saving state (of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. ) and selects a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1715). Specifically, variation pattern P12 is selected.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, after the variation pattern selection (S1704, S1706, S1709, S1710, S1711, S1714, S1715, S1718, S1719, S1720), other processing (S1705, Figure 27) and finish this process. In other processing (S1705), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 through output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage section 85a is shifted to the lower side by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage section 85a, that is, (if the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth one of the first special figure reservations is set. The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 28 is executed. In the special figure 1 variation start process (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol fluctuation processing]
As shown in Figure 37, in the special symbol fluctuation processing (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of Figure 28, see Figure 11) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON or not (S1903), and if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" or not ( S1905). If it is determined in S1905 that the probability variation counter is "0", the probability variation flag is turned OFF and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903) and if it is determined that the probability variation counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process moves to S1907.

Then, in S1907, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the time saving flag counts the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner during the time saving state. Decrease the value of the counter by 1 (S1908), determine whether the value of the time saving counter is "0" or not (S1909), and if it is "0" (YES in S1909), turn off the time saving flag (S1910), Proceed to processing S1911. Further, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907) and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process advances to S1911. In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processes such as stopping the variable display of the special symbols according to the judgment results of the special symbol propriety judgment random numbers and jackpot type determination random numbers are performed (S1912), and this process is ended.

[Special design confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the special symbol confirmation process (S1106), first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), then it is determined whether the type of jackpot is a 15R jackpot (15R 1st jackpot, 15R 2nd jackpot, or 15R 4th jackpot) (S2002) . If it is determined in S2002 that the type of jackpot is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2002), the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is set to "15" (S2003), and in S2005 Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the type of jackpot is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S2002), that is, the type of jackpot in this case is a 2R jackpot, so the value of the round counter is set to "2" ( S2004), the process moves to S2005.

In S2005, a jackpot opening pattern is set according to the type of jackpot (S2005), and the process moves to S2006. Here, the opening pattern of the big winning hole is determined according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 6), and in this embodiment, the big winning hole that opens and closes in a specific round is fixed. Specifically, in any jackpot, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened and closed in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and the first grand prize opening 30 is opened and closed in the 3rd to 15th rounds (if there is a jackpot of 3 or more rounds). It is assumed that On the other hand, in different jackpot types, although the same big winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole 35 in the first round) is opened and closed in a specific round, the opening/closing pattern (opening pattern) may be different.

That is, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the jackpot is determined for each type of jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a 15R first jackpot, an opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot is set, and the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot is executed during the execution of the 15R first jackpot game. . Also, if it is a 15R second jackpot, set the opening pattern for the 15R second jackpot, if it is the 2R third jackpot, set the opening pattern for the 2R third jackpot, and if it is the 15R fourth jackpot, set the opening pattern for the 15R second jackpot. Set an opening pattern for the jackpot. Then, the corresponding jackpot opening pattern is executed in each jackpot game.

In S2006, a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2006). Opening commands are determined by the type of jackpot, and include opening commands for 15R jackpots (15R 1st jackpot, 15R 2nd jackpot, and 15R 4th jackpot), opening commands for 2R 3rd jackpot, etc. corresponding to each jackpot. Each is provided. According to the set opening command, the corresponding opening period is then executed. Moreover, in S2007, the opening period of the jackpot game is started (S2007), and the special figure operation status is set to "4" (S2008).

Further, if it is determined in S2001 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2001), then it is determined whether the small hit flag is ON (S2009). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S2009), a small hit opening pattern is set (S2010), and the process moves to S2011. Here, the opening pattern for the small win is such that the second big prize opening 35 is opened twice for 0.9 seconds each. This is an opening pattern similar to the opening pattern of the 2R jackpot. In S2011, in order to start the small winning game, the opening command of the small winning game is set (S2011), the opening period of the small winning game is started (S2012), and the special figure operation status is set to "5" ( S2013). Then, the main control unit 80 transmits the set small winning opening command to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing through output processing (S201), and the sub-control unit 90 receives the small winning opening command. At 90, a predetermined game effect corresponding to the opening period is performed. In addition, in S2009, if it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2009), neither the jackpot game nor the small win game will start, so the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2014) and the process ends. .

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
As shown in FIG. 39, in the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108), it is first determined whether the probability variation flag is ON or not (S2101), and if it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2101), the probability variation flag is ON. The flag is turned OFF (S2102), and then it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined in S2103 that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104) and the process proceeds to S2105. Note that if it is determined NO in S2101, the process proceeds to S2103 without turning off the variable probability flag, and if it is determined NO in S2103, the process proceeds to S2105 without turning off the time saving flag. In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, the game is controlled to be in a low probability state and a non-time saving state. In the first embodiment, since the low base state is always maintained during the non-time saving state, the low base state is also controlled during the execution of the jackpot game.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all openings of the big winning devices (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) have been completed (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game. If it is determined that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), then check whether a predetermined round is being executed, that is, the jackpot (first jackpot or second jackpot) set for the predetermined round. It is determined whether the opening pattern (opening/closing pattern) is being executed (S2106). If it is determined in S2106 that the round is not in progress (S2106), then it is determined whether it is time to start the round (S2107). This is determined based on the opening pattern of the jackpot game set for each jackpot type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, the determination is made based on whether the opening period has ended and it is time to execute the first opening process of the first round. If the first round has already started, the determination is made based on whether the previous round has ended and a predetermined interval period has elapsed. Note that the round is also simply referred to as "R".

If it is determined in S2107 that it is time to start a round (YES in S2107), a round start command for the corresponding round is set (S2108), a big prize opening opening process is performed (S2109), and the process moves to S2110. As a result, the big prize opening becomes open and a predetermined round starts. In addition, in S2108, a round start command that can specify the round to start is set, such as "1R start command" for the start of the first round and "2R start command" for the start of the second round. . The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 through the output process in S201. In addition, in the big winning opening opening process of S2109, a jackpot opening pattern is started which is determined according to the type of jackpot to be executed, and which is determined for the round to be started. In S2110, it is determined whether the starting round is the V round (first round or second round), that is, whether the starting round is the second big winning opening 35 (also referred to as "V attacker") having the specific area 39 inside. It is determined whether it is a round in which the game is opened and the movable piece 150 is operated (the game ball can pass through the specific area 39) (S2110). In this embodiment, two rounds, the first round and the second round, are set to be V rounds in which the movable piece 150 is operated.

If it is determined in S2110 that the round to be started is not the V round (first round or second round), that is, it is determined to be the third round or later (NO in S2110), the process ends. This may be determined using the value of a round counter for each type of jackpot, or may be determined by separately providing a round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2110 that the round to start is the V round (first round or second round) (YES in S2110), the validity period of the specific area is set based on the predetermined specific area validity pattern. At the same time, the opening/closing operation of the specific area is started based on a predetermined specific area opening/closing operation pattern (S2112), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2107 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2107), the process ends. Here, examples of cases in which it is determined that it is not the time to start a round include, for example, during the opening period before the start of one round, or during the interval period after the end of the round.

Here, in the V round, at the timing when a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON, the game state display 46 is set to a predetermined display mode, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game has a high probability. Notify that the condition is reached. Specifically, the game status display 46 is composed of three LEDs "a1a2a3". In the first embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state), the display mode is "a1□a2□a3□" (for example, □: off, ■: on). Further, when a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during a jackpot game and the V flag is turned on, the display mode is set to "a1■a2■a3■". Then, when the jackpot game ends and the game state is set to a high probability state, the display mode is set to "a1□a2□a3□". In addition, the lighting control timing of the game status display 46 is not limited to this timing, and during the jackpot game, the display mode of "a1□a2□a3□" remains even if the game ball passes through a specific area. , it may be displayed as "a1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■" at the timing of transitioning to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" at the timing of transitioning from the high probability state to the low probability state. .

That is, in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 42), which will be described later, the V flag is turned ON only when V passing (passing of a game ball to the specific area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the Even if V passing is detected during the above period), the V flag is not turned on. Note that when the V flag is ON, the probability change flag is turned ON at a predetermined timing. That is, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (gaming state setting process (FIG. 36) to be described later). By doing this, the V flag is prevented from being turned on based on V passing due to fraudulent activity, that is, it is prevented from being set to a high probability state fraudulently.

In the first embodiment, in the V valid period setting process (S2111), the period (first period) is set in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be valid even in the case of the 15R second jackpot. However, as another aspect, in the case of the 15R second jackpot, the first period may not be set in the 1R and 2R. That is, in the case of the 15R second jackpot, the 1st and 2nd rounds may be set as the second period. In the jackpot game related to the 15R second jackpot, the opening time of the second jackpot 35 is set to an extremely short time of 0.1 seconds, so there is a small possibility that the game ball will enter the second jackpot 35. Although it is extremely low, if it is set in the second period, even if a ball enters the field, the V flag will not be turned on. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being turned on illegally or from being turned on due to rare ball hits. In this embodiment, the V round is the first round and the second round, but it may be set to other rounds, the V round may be set to only one round, or three or more rounds may be set. It may be set to

If it is determined in S2106 that a round is in progress (YES in S2106), the number of balls entering the big winning hole in that round will reach the specified maximum number of balls (10 balls per round in this embodiment 1). It is determined whether the target value has been reached (S2113). If the prescribed number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2113), it is determined whether it is the end time of the round in progress (whether all opening patterns defined for the round have been completed) (S2114). Then, in S2114, if it is determined that it is not the end time of the round (NO in S2114), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2113 that the specified number of balls entered (the number of balls entered in the round is 10) (YES in S2113), or in S2114 it is the end time of the round (the number of balls entered in the round is 10), If it is determined that all open patterns have been completed (YES in S2114), that is, if either of the two round termination conditions is satisfied, the process moves to S2115. In S2115, a round end command for the corresponding round is set (S2115), and the process moves to S2116. In addition, in S2115, a round end command that can specify the round to end is set, such as "1R end command" if the first round ends, and "2R end command" if the second round ends. . The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 through the output process in S201. In S2116, a predetermined big prize opening closing process is executed (S2116), then the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2117), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2118). If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2118), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2118), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (S2119), and a jackpot ending effect is set. Start (S2120). Then, the jackpot end flag is turned on (S2121), and the process ends. In addition, the round counter becomes "0" when the round (round game) is executed 15 times if it is a long hit (15R jackpot), and it becomes "0" when the round (round game) is executed 2 times if it is a short hit (2R jackpot). When executed, it becomes "0".

Also, if the jackpot end flag is ON in S2105 (YES in S2105), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether the execution time of the jackpot ending performance has elapsed (S2122), and the ending time is If the time has not passed (NO in S2122), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2123), and a game state setting process (S2124) to be described later is performed. Then, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2125), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) will be executed again as the special symbol operation processing (FIG. 24).

[Game status setting process]
As shown in FIG. 40, in the gaming state setting process (S2121), it is first determined whether the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned ON in specific area sensor detection processing (FIG. 35), which will be described later. If it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), the probability variation counter is set to "140" (S2203), and the V flag is turned OFF (S2204). , the process proceeds to S2205. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined whether or not to set the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high probability state based on whether or not the V flag is turned on in this gaming state setting process.

In S2205, it is determined whether the finished jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot. If it is determined that it is not a 15R jackpot, that is, a 2R third jackpot (NO in S2205), then whether or not the gaming state before the jackpot game, that is, the gaming state when the 2R third jackpot occurs, is a time saving state. (S2208). If it is determined that the time saving state is not present (NO in S2208), the process ends without turning on the time saving flag. As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a high probability state, a special symbol non-time saving state, and a low base state (that is, a high probability low base state). This high-accuracy/low-base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner 140 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2205 that the finished jackpot game (jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2205), or in S2208 when the 2R third jackpot is reached, the gaming state is a time saving state. If it is determined that it is (YES in S2208), the time saving flag is turned on (S2206), the time saving counter is set to "140" (S2207), and the process is finished. As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a high probability state, a special symbol time saving state, and a high base state (that is, a high probability high base state). This high-accuracy-high base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner 140 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), it is determined whether or not the finished jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot, as described above (S2209). If it is determined in S2209 that it is not a 15R jackpot, that is, it is a 2R third jackpot (NO in S2209), then the gaming state before the jackpot game, that is, the gaming state when the 2R third jackpot occurs, is It is determined whether the state is the same (S2210). If it is determined in S2210 that the time saving state is not present (NO in S2210), the process ends without turning on the time saving flag. As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a low probability state, a non-time saving state with special symbols, and a low base state (that is, a low probability low base state). On the other hand, if it is determined in S2209 that the finished jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2209), or in S22100 when the 2R third jackpot is reached, the gaming state is a time-saving state. If it is determined that it is (YES in S2210), the time saving flag is turned on (S2211), the time saving counter is set to "100" (S2212), and the process is finished. As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a low probability state, a special symbol time saving state, and a high base state (that is, a low probability high base state). This low-probability-high base state ends when either of the following conditions is satisfied: the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner 100 times, or the next jackpot occurs. Further, the time saving counter and the probability change counter count the total number of times the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in the case of the 2R third jackpot, the processing (S2208, S2210) to determine whether the gaming state before the jackpot game is a time-saving state is performed based on the operating state of the time-saving function before and after the jackpot game, and the high base. This is to make the operating state of the function (open extension function) the same as that of a small hit. If these operating states are different between the small hit and the 2R 3rd jackpot, even if it is difficult to recognize which one has been won by the opening pattern of the big winning hole, it may be difficult to identify which one has been won (jackpot) depending on the subsequent operating state. This is because it will be determined whether it is a small hit or a small hit. This makes it difficult to distinguish between a small hit and a 2R third jackpot based on the opening pattern of the big winning opening, and also by the operating states of the time saving function and high base generation function that occur afterwards.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
As shown in FIG. 41, in the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), it is first determined whether the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small winning end flag is a flag indicating that all the openings of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) have been completed in the small winning game. If it is determined in S2301 that the small winning end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), check whether the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) is being opened, that is, for the small winning opening. It is determined whether the release pattern is being executed (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big winning opening is not in the opening operation (NO in S2302), it is determined whether the time (timing) to open the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) has arrived, that is, the opening of the small hit. After the period has elapsed, it is determined whether the time (timing) to start a predetermined opening operation has arrived (S2303).

In S2303, if it is determined that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is the time to open the big winning opening (YES in S2303), the V invalid period setting process is performed (S2304), and the second big winning opening is opened according to the small winning opening pattern (see Figure 7). 35 is opened (S2305), and the process ends. In the V invalid period setting process (S2304), the detection of game balls by the specific area sensor 39a is invalidated during the opening of the second big prize opening 35 in the small winning game and for several seconds after the second big prize opening 35 is closed. Set to the period for determination (second period). Further, in the first embodiment, a period other than the period defined as the valid period in the above-mentioned V valid period setting process (S2111) is set as an invalid period (second period). Therefore, in this V invalid period setting process, it is checked whether the valid period has been reached, that is, whether the V invalid period has been set. Specifically, check whether the V timer (provided in the RAM of the main control board 80), which counts down the passage of the V validity period, is set to "0" (that is, a state with no validity period). do. If the V timer is not "0", set the V timer to "0". Note that the V timer is set to "0" without checking whether the V timer is "0" or not. In other words, it may be set to a state without a valid period. Thereby, even if V passes during a small win, if the game state before the small win game is a normal state, the game state after the small win game is not shifted to a high probability state. However, during the small winning game, the movable piece 150 that allows passage through the specific area 39 does not operate, so the game ball will not pass through the specific area unless an unexpected situation (failure, malfunction, fraud, etc.) occurs. .

In S2302, if it is determined that the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is in the process of opening (YES in S2302), the number of balls entering the big winning hole during the small winning game is the specified maximum number of balls entering the big winning hole. It is determined whether the number (10 in this embodiment 1) has been reached (S2306). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is determined whether it is time to end the release operation (whether all small winning release patterns have been completed) (S2307). Then, if it is determined that the opening operation of the big winning opening has not been completed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2306 that the number of balls that entered the big winning hole during the small winning game has reached the specified number of balls that entered the big winning hole (YES in S2506), or the opening operation of the big winning hole ends in S2307. If it is determined that it is the time (YES in S2307), a predetermined big prize opening closing process is performed (S2308), and the process moves to S2311. In other words, the conditions for ending the small winning game are (1) completion of the opening operation specified for the small winning game that is currently being executed (for example, opening for 0.9 seconds twice), and (2) the small winning game that is currently being executed. Two conditions are defined: that a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) have entered the ball. Then, when one of the conditions is satisfied, the condition for ending the small winning game is established based on the previously satisfied condition. In S2311, as a small winning ending process to end the small winning game, the ending command of the small winning game is set (S2311), the ending period of the small winning is started (S2312), and the small winning ending flag is turned ON (S2313). ), the process ends. Here, in the small hit end process in S2311, the process of setting the ending command is performed, and the ending command for the small hit is set. Furthermore, the ending period for the small win is the same as the ending period for the 2R third jackpot, which also makes it difficult to distinguish between the small win and the 2R third jackpot.

In S2301, if it is determined that the small win end flag is ON (YES in S2301), then it is determined whether the ending period (ending time) of the small win has elapsed (S2315), and the ending period has elapsed. If it is determined that it is not (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2316), the small hit flag is turned OFF (S2317), and the special figure operation status is set to "1". ” (S2318), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) will be executed again as the special symbol operation processing (FIG. 24). Note that the probability change flag and time saving flag are not switched from ON to OFF at the start of the small winning game. Further, when the small winning game ends, the game state setting process (S2124, FIG. 33) is not performed. That is, in this pachinko game machine 1, the game state is not changed before and after the execution of the small winning game.

[Specific area sensor detection processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a specific area sensor detection process (S207) following the special figure operation process (S206). In the specific area sensor detection process (S207), as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). If it is determined that there is no detection (NO in S2401), the process ends. If it is determined in S2401 that there is a detection (YES in S2401), it is determined whether the V is within the valid period (S2402). The V valid period is a period set in the V valid period setting process (S2111) in the special electric accessory process 1 (FIG. 39) described above. The V validity period is set for the first and second rounds in the jackpot game.

In addition, if it is determined in S2402 that the V validity period is in effect (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and whether or not the currently running jackpot game is a 2R jackpot (2R 3rd jackpot) is determined. (S2404). If it is determined that it is not a 2R jackpot (NO in S2404), that is, if it is a 15R jackpot, a 1st V passing command is set (S2405) and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a 2R jackpot (YES in S2404), a second V passing command is set (S2406) and the process ends. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this V passing command to the sub control board 90 at a predetermined timing, and the sub control board 90 displays effect symbols according to the type of the received V passing command, the game state at that time, etc. Execute game effects in the area, etc.

If it is determined in S2402 that the V valid period is not in effect (NO in S2402), an invalid period pass command is set without turning on the V flag (S2407), and the process ends. In principle, the first V passing command is a command for causing the sub-control board 90 to perform V passing notification control. On the other hand, the second V passage command is a command for not allowing the sub-control board 90 to perform notification control of V passage in principle. Further, the invalid period passing command is issued to the main control board 80 or the sub control board 90 to indicate that the game ball has passed through a specific area during the invalid period of the specific area. In other words, this is a command to notify that there is a possibility that some kind of malfunction or fraud has occurred. This notification may be made using the display screen 7a, a frame lamp, a panel lamp, a speaker, etc., or may be made in the hall computer by transmitting the information to the hall computer. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 executes such specific area sensor detection processing (S207) and V validity period setting processing (S2111) to enable or disable the passing of game balls to the specific area 39. (specific area state switching means).

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting ball entry process (S208) following the specific area sensor detection process (S207). As shown in FIG. 43, in the starting ball entry process (S208), first, the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 is read out. (S2501). Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 has increased by "1" (S2502). If it is determined in S2502 that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S2502), the process moves to S2503. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 in S307 in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second starting port.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S2502), the process moves to S2506. In S2503, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding starting port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S2503). Next, in S2504, the obtained random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S2504). Specifically, the value of the random number counter for determining the validity of special symbols (random value for determining validity of special symbols) acquired when the ball enters the starting hole is changed depending on the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state). to determine whether you hit the jackpot or missed the jackpot. Further, if the determination result (prior determination result) is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined. This is a preliminary judgment (so-called "holding") in which the validity judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a jackpot) regarding the special drawing 2 hold is performed prior to the judgment (S1303, S1309) in the special drawing 2 holding judgment process (S1202), which will be described later. This corresponds to "read ahead").

The preliminary determination is a jackpot determination table corresponding to the set gaming mode (see FIG. 9(A)). If it is a probability state), it is possible to determine whether it matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. In addition, as other pre-judgment aspects, as a fluctuation pattern information determination table that can determine fluctuation pattern information, there is a fluctuation pattern information determination table for normal states (for low probability states) and a fluctuation pattern information determination table for high probability states (for high probability states). It is assumed that the variation pattern information determination table has the following. In the preliminary determination, predetermined fluctuation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (the value of a random number counter for special symbol validity determination, etc.) and the fluctuation pattern information determination table according to the gaming state. It is possible to do so. From this selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and whether a game performance with high jackpot reliability will be executed.

Next, in S2505, game information including at least the reserved ball number data related to the second special symbol read out in S2501 and the information pre-determined in S2504 (pre-determination information) is generated as a special symbol 2 starting ball entry command. , is set in the output buffer for sending commands to the sub-control board 90, which is provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2505). In addition, as the special figure 2 starting ball entry command, part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read out in S2503 may be sent as is to the sub-control board, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number Instead of transmitting as is, game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information, etc.) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted.

In addition, by analyzing the special symbol 2 start ball entry command transmitted from the main control section 80 in the sub-control section 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a jackpot, how many balls are reserved for the second special symbol, and the jackpot type. The sub-control unit 90 is capable of identifying which one. In addition to this, in this embodiment 1, by analyzing the special pattern 2 starting ball entry command, it is possible to determine whether or not the obtained special pattern 2 acquisition random number will be a jackpot when judged in a high probability state, and It is possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot when judged based on the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit stores the received special figure 2 starting ball entry command as pending (production pending information), pre-determines the production pending information at a specific timing, and when it is determined whether it is correct or not in a low probability state. It becomes possible to determine whether performance suspension information that is determined to be a jackpot is stored.

In addition, from the perspective of fraud prevention, among the obtained random values read in S2503, the random value for determining the validity of the special symbol is not sent as is to the sub-control unit, but the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type) The command data includes information indicating the random number value for type determination), the value of the reach random number counter (random reach value), the value of the variable pattern random number counter (the random variable pattern value), and the information indicating the result of advance judgment. It is possible to generate and set it as a 2-start pitch entry command.

Next, in S2506, similarly to the process related to the above-mentioned special figure 2, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 has increased by "1" (S2506). If it is determined in S2506 that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S2506), the process moves to S2507. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls of special map 1 in S311 in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2506 that the number of special map 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S2506), the process is ended as is.

In S2507, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2507), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, the high base state is established (YES in S2507), the process is ended as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2507 that the time saving flag is OFF, that is, in a low base state (NO in S2507), the process proceeds to the process related to preliminary determination from S2508 onwards. Here, if the time saving flag is ON, that is, if the current gaming state is a high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of balls entering the second starting port 21 is activated, and the validity of the special drawing 2 is activated. The situation is such that it is easy to make a judgment. In addition, in the present embodiment 1, as will be described later, extinguishment of special drawing 2 reservation (fluctuation display of the second special symbol) is executed with priority over expulsion of special symbol 1 reservation (fluctuation display of the first special symbol). (So-called special map 2 priority variable machine). In such a configuration, for example, a preliminary determination of special drawing 1 is performed, the result is notified to the player through a notice or other performance, and when it is clearly shown that the preliminary determination result is a jackpot, the player: Taking advantage of the priority of special drawing 2 pending consumption, intentionally eliminate the special drawing 2 holding (setting it to "0") at any timing with the intention of hitting the jackpot related to special drawing 1 for which the preliminary judgment result was shown. It becomes possible to use technological intervention to generate It is not preferable from the viewpoint of fairness of the game that the player is able to adjust the timing of occurrence of such a jackpot. Therefore, if the current gaming state is not a low base state but a high base state (YES in S2507), the process related to the preliminary determination of special symbol 1 after S2508 is not performed, and this process is ended.

The processing in S2508 to S2510 is the same processing as in S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read out (S2508), A preliminary determination is made on the read obtained random number value (S2509), and game information including at least the reserved ball number data related to the first special symbol read in S2501 and the information preliminary determined in S2509 (prior determination information), It is generated as a special figure 1 starting ball entry command and set in the output buffer for sending the command to the sub control board 90, which is provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2510). In addition, the preliminary determination (pending pre-reading) of S2509 is performed prior to the validity determination (S1603, S1609) in the later-described special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207).

[Power outage monitoring process]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S209) following the pending ball count process (S208). In the power-off monitoring process (S209), as shown in FIG. 44, first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601). This is determined based on the "power-off signal" that is transmitted when the voltage drop monitoring circuit 105 described above detects a drop in the power supply voltage. If it is determined in S2601 that there is no power supply voltage input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the gaming state information stored in the RAM of the main control unit 80 and the gaming state stored in the payout control unit 110 The information is stored in the backup area of each RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned ON (S2603), and thereafter loop processing is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

In addition, as the game state information to be backed up and stored in the backup area when a power-off signal is received, at least information indicating the set game mode (game mode setting information), special symbol status flag, and normal symbol status flag , the value of the pending memory counter (special symbols, regular symbols), the value of the probability variation flag, the value of the time saving flag, information indicating the progress status of the jackpot game, information indicating the progress status of the small winning game, remaining variation time of the special symbol, Information indicating the number of unpaid prize balls can be provided. These gaming state information are stored (memory retained) in a backup area (backup RAM) to which power supply is maintained by a backup power source. In addition, this backed-up gaming state information can be used to change the control state (gaming state) when power supply is restarted after a power outage, etc., and the control state (gaming state) at the time of a power outage, etc. (before the power outage occurred). This is the information (data) necessary to restore the state

[Mode setting monitoring processing]
Next, the mode setting monitoring process (S210) will be explained using FIG. 45. This mode setting monitoring process is a process that constantly monitors the setting state of the mode setting switch while power is being supplied (after the game starts). In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the game mode setting can be changed only when the power is turned on and when the game machine is initialized. Even if the mode setting switch (in the supplied state) is operated, the gaming mode will not be changed immediately. However, it is not preferable that the game mode actually set on the game machine and the game mode indicated by the operating section 82a of the mode setting switch 82 do not match. Furthermore, if there is such a discrepancy, there is a risk that a game store clerk or the like may misidentify the game mode set on the game machine when checking the settings of the game machine. For example, a situation may occur where a change is mistakenly assumed to have already been made, even though the change is originally required.

In order to prevent such a situation, the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment constantly monitors the setting state (selection information) of the mode setting switch 82 (every predetermined control cycle) to prevent the above-mentioned discrepancy. By quickly discovering the error and making a predetermined notification (error notification), it is possible to notify the surroundings. Specifically, in the mode setting monitoring process (S210), first, the selection information of the mode setting switch is read (S3201), and then the gaming mode corresponding to the read selection information, the gaming mode stored in the RAM, That is, the game mode currently set in the game machine is compared and determined (S3202). Then, in S3203, if it is determined that the results of the comparison performed in S3202 match (YES in S3203), it is determined whether an error is being reported (S3205), and if it is determined that an error is not being reported (S3205), processing is performed. Finish. This will happen if the setting state of the mode setting switch 82 is not changed erroneously or fraudulently after the start of the game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3203 that the results of the comparison performed in S3202 do not match (NO in S3203), a predetermined error notification is performed (S3204) and the process ends. For error notification, an error message indicating that "the mode setting switch has been illegally operated" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or a predetermined error notification is made using the panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, or speaker 67. It is possible to go there. Further, in the error notification, both the correct gaming mode setting and the gaming mode selected by the mode setting switch may be indicated in some manner. This makes it possible to quickly correct (return) the setting position of the game mode by the mode setting switch 82 and end the error notification. Note that this error processing (error notification) is performed while maintaining a state in which the game can be continued. This is because the game mode cannot be changed (the game mode has not been changed) unless the game machine is initialized.

Also, during this error notification (error processing), execute S3203 again, and if it is determined that they match (YES in S3203), then it is determined whether an error notification is being performed (S3205), and it is determined that an error notification is being performed. If so (YES in S3205), the error notification ends (S3206) and the process ends. This makes it possible to return to normal gaming without error notification. As a result, the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment monitors the operation of the mode setting switch 82 performed during power supply, and also monitors the operation of the mode setting switch 82 performed while power supply is stopped, based on the restored gaming state information. Monitoring is possible by determining whether the gaming mode matches the gaming mode at the time of power cutoff. This makes it possible to prevent the game mode from being changed illegally or erroneously.

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 will be explained based on FIG. 46. Note that the counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub-control board 90 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 46 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and executes it. . As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, CPU initialization processing is first performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack settings, constant settings, CPU 92 settings, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the result of this determination is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process moves to S4011. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4011 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. In other words, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned ON but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. In S4011, initial processing is performed to notify the setting (notification process) when there is a setting change of the game mode, which will be described later, and to check the operation (initial operation) of the movable decorative members 14 and 17 (board movable part and frame movable part). is performed (S4011), and the process moves to S4004. Note that S4001 to S4003 and S4011 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed updating process (S4005), the values of various performance determining random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. Note that the random numbers for determining a performance include a random number for determining a preview performance that determines a preview performance, and a random number for determining a performance symbol that determines a performance symbol. The random number updating method can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating, the random number values may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. The random number for performance determination is acquired at a predetermined timing. This timing may be, for example, when the main control board 80 sends a control signal (starting ball command) notifying that a starting ball has arrived, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal (starting ball entering command) notifying the start of fluctuation. This can be done when a fluctuation start command (fluctuation start command) is sent, or when a fluctuation effect pattern (to be described later) is determined. The acquired random number for effect determination is stored in a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In this first embodiment, random numbers for determining character previews, random numbers for determining step-up notices, random numbers for determining pseudo-variation notices, and random numbers for determining movable part notices are used as random numbers for determining advance notice effects. The preview performance to be executed is determined using the obtained value of the random number for performance determination and each preview determination table.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various presentation devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) to perform various operations according to the received command. Performances (performance symbol game performances, special game performances associated with jackpot games and small win games, etc.) are executed. The production control microcomputer 91 then permits an interrupt (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of performance symbols etc. executed on the display screen 7a (performance symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, lighting control of various lamps, and operation of movable decorative members are performed. It becomes possible to perform control, audio output control from a speaker, etc.

[Initial processing]
Next, the initial processing (S4011) executed when the power is turned on will be described using FIGS. 47 and 48. This initial processing (S4011) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and is executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on) and is not executed thereafter. In addition, the initial processing mainly includes notification of settings on the display screen 7a (effect pattern display section 7b) when settings are changed, and initial operations of the movable decorative members 14 and 17 (frame movable section and board movable section). is executed. In addition, when a setting change is made, the execution timing of these settings is changed so that the visibility of the setting notification is not obstructed by the initial movement of the movable decorative members 14 and 17 (frame movable part and board movable part). The cases are differentiated depending on whether it is done or not.

Specifically, in the initial processing (S4011), it is first determined whether a setting change command has been received from the main control unit 80 (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that a settings change command has been received, that is, settings have been changed (set to a settings change state) under the control of the main control unit 80 (YES in S4101), A setting notification command is transmitted (S4102), a frame movable initial operation start command for executing the initial motion of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable part) is transmitted (S4103), and the process moves to S4104. By transmitting the setting notification command, the sub-control unit 90 executes setting notification (setting change notification) on the display screen 7a (effect pattern display unit) via the image control unit 100 (image control board). Executes display control for Note that the configuration notification (setting change notification) of this embodiment is as shown in FIG. It shows what has been done. Furthermore, instead of this aspect, it is also possible to specifically display which game mode has been set, which game mode has been changed to which game mode, and the like.

Furthermore, by transmitting the frame movable initial operation start command, the sub-control unit 90 starts the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) via the lamp control board 107. The movable decorative member 17 (frame movable part) is provided with a detected piece (not shown) that rotates with the rotational movement of the movable decorative member. The initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 is to rotate the movable decorative member 17 by 1800 degrees (5 rotations) around the rotation axis by driving and controlling the drive source (stepping motor), and then the detected piece is moved to the origin. The operation mode is such that it stops at the position detected by the sensor 17b (predetermined initial operation mode). Note that the execution period of the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 is supposed to be completed in 8 seconds unless there is any malfunction (malfunction of mechanism or sensor). Moreover, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable part) is only a rotational movement at the position where the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable part) is installed. Therefore, during the execution process of the initial operation, the movable decorative member 17 does not move to a position overlapping the display screen 7a that notifies the settings. It does not impede the visibility of notifications).

As a result, in this embodiment, the setting notification and the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable part), which are executed after the power is turned on, are executed in parallel (see FIG. 49(A)). In addition, by making it possible to execute these processes in parallel, the initial operation can be quickly completed (completed), the game machine can be quickly put into a playable state, and the time taken by game store staff to check the initial process can be shortened. To make it possible to increase the operating rate of gaming machines. Further, in the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (plate movable part), as shown in FIG. 50(b), at least a part of the movable decorative member 14 is Since the setting notification passes (positions, moves) over a position overlapping the display screen 7a that displays the setting notification, if the setting notification and the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 are executed at the same time (in parallel), the setting There is a possibility that the visibility of the notification may be obstructed. Therefore, as will be described later, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (plate movable part) is performed after the setting notification is executed for a predetermined time (5 seconds) (after the setting notification is completed). shall be. Note that when the initial movement of the board shown in FIG. 50(b) is completed and the initial processing is completed, the display mode is changed to the state shown in FIG. 50(c), and the game becomes ready for play.

In S4104, it is determined whether 5 seconds (specific notification time) have elapsed since the start of the setting notification, and if it is determined that 5 seconds (specific notification time) has not elapsed (NO in S4104), the determination in S4104 is made again. I do. If it is determined in S4104 that the execution time (execution period) of the setting notification has exceeded 5 seconds (specific notification time) (YES in S4104), the process moves to S4105. It is assumed that a timer means for measuring the execution time of the setting notification is provided, and by determining the time value of the timer means, it is determined whether the execution time of the setting notification has reached the specific notification time. In addition, in this embodiment, 5 seconds is set as the specific notification time, but if the time is sufficient for the game mode setter such as a game store clerk to reliably recognize that there has been a setting change. , or other lengths of time (long or short). Also, during the period when this setting notification is being executed, the frame movement initial operation is being executed in parallel.

In S4105, it is determined whether the initial movement of the frame, which is executed in parallel with the setting notification, has ended (S4105). In this example, since the frame movable initial operation time (8 seconds) is set longer than the specific notification time (5 seconds), the first judgment is that the frame movable initial operation has not been completed. . If it is determined in S4105 that the initial movement of the frame has not been completed, that is, the detected piece has not yet been detected by the origin sensor 17b after the execution of the predetermined initial movement (NO in S4105), then the frame It is determined whether a set time (limit time set for the frame movable initial motion) has elapsed since the start of the movable initial motion. This means that if a failure or malfunction (damage, foreign matter, etc.) occurs in the drive source, drive mechanism, origin sensor, etc., the detected piece will be detected by the origin sensor 17b no matter how much time has passed after the initial operation started. In other words, there is a possibility that the initial operation will not be completed.

In order to prevent such a situation, a time longer than the initial frame movable operation time (8 seconds) determined for the initial frame movable operation is set as a set time (limit time), and this set time (in this example, If the initial movement of the frame is not completed even after a period of time (set to 12 seconds) has elapsed, an error notification is executed and the process moves on to the next process. Specifically, if it is determined in S4107 that the set time (12 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial movement of the frame (YES in S4107), a frame movement error notification is executed (S4108), and the process moves to S4106. The frame movable error notification displays the words "Frame movable error" on the display screen 7a to notify that there is some kind of malfunction in the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable part).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4107 that the set time (12 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the initial movement of the frame (NO in S4107), it is determined again whether the initial movement of the frame has ended (S4105). After making the determination in S4105 a plurality of times, if it is determined that the frame movable initial motion has ended (YES in S4105), then a board movable initial motion start command is transmitted (S4106), and the process moves to S4109. That is, after the setting notification of the specific setting notification time is completed and the frame movement initial operation is completed (or the set time elapses without being completed), the board movement initial operation is started. As a result, it is possible to notify the setting of a specific notification time (5 seconds) and to terminate the initial movement of the frame before executing the initial movement of the panel that covers a part of the display section of the display screen 7a. becomes. This also prevents the visibility of the setting notification indicating that a setting change has been made from being obstructed by the initial movement of the movable decorative member 14 (movable panel part), and ensures that the setting notification that there has been a setting change is notified. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, since the initial movement of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable part) is completed before the initial movement of the movable decorative member 14 (plate movable part) is started, the initial movement of the movable decorative member 14 (plate movable part) is completed. Before the start of the process, time for setting notification is reliably secured, and initial operations of a movable decorative member 14 and a movable decorative member 17 are performed separately, thereby making it possible to reliably perform each initial operation. Further, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of a situation where a large number of movable decorative members 14 and 17 operate simultaneously and the driving power becomes insufficient. In addition, the initial operation of moving the frame, which does not obstruct the visibility of the setting notification, can be executed in parallel after the setting notification, so that the initial processing is completed as quickly as possible, and the game is ready for play quickly. make it possible.

In S4109, it is determined whether the initial movement of the plate has been completed (S4109), and it is determined that it has not been completed, that is, the detected piece has not yet been detected by the origin sensor 14b after the specified initial movement has been performed. If so (NO in S4109), then it is determined whether a set time (limit time set for the initial operation of the panel) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation of the panel. Similar to the initial movement of the frame described above, if a failure or malfunction (damage, foreign matter, etc.) occurs in the drive source, drive mechanism, origin sensor, etc., how much time has passed after the start of the initial movement. This is because there is a possibility that the detected piece will not be detected by the origin sensor 17b, that is, the initial operation will not be completed.

In order to prevent such a situation, a time longer than the initial operation time (6 seconds) of the initial operation of the operation panel is set as a set time (limit time), and this set time (in this example, If the initial movement of the board is not completed even after the time (set to 9 seconds) has elapsed, an error notification is executed and the process moves on to the next process. Specifically, if it is determined in S4110 that the set time (9 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial movement of the board (YES in S4110), a board movement error notification is executed (S4111), and the initial processing ends. The plate movable error notification displays the words "plate movable error" on the display screen 7a to notify that there is some kind of malfunction in the movable decorative member 14 (plate movable part). On the other hand, if it is determined in S4109 that the initial operation of moving the board has ended (YES in S4109), the initial processing is finished.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 49(A) [Settings changed: Initial processing] is a diagram showing the approximate timing of the initial processing that is executed when it is determined in S4101 that a settings change command has been received. According to this, the setting notification (t1 → t2) and the initial movement of the frame (t1 → t3) are executed (started) in parallel, and after both the setting notification and the initial movement of the frame are completed, the initial movement of the panel is performed. This indicates that (t4→t5) is to be started.

If it is determined in S4101 that a settings change command has not been received, that is, settings have not been changed (not in a settings change state) under the control of the main control unit 80 (NO in S4101), the game mode Execute [processing when no setting change is made (S4112)] to perform initial processing when no setting change is made, and end the process. When not receiving the setting change command, the sub-control unit 90 does not notify the setting on the display screen 7a. Thereby, it becomes possible to quickly complete the initial processing when there is no change in the setting of the game mode.

In the process when there is no setting change (S4112), first, a frame movable initial operation start command is sent to execute the initial motion of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable part) (S4201), and then the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable part) A board movable initial operation start command is sent to execute the initial operation of the controller (S4202), and the process moves to S4203. Through S4201 and S4202, the movable decorative member 14 and the movable decorative member 17 start initial operations in parallel. If it is determined that the settings change command has not been received (the settings are not changed), the setting notification will not be notified on the display screen 7a that is controlled by the sub-control unit, so the execution time of the settings notification will be changed. The initial movement of the frame and the initial movement of the board are executed simultaneously (in parallel) without ensuring the following.

This is because the setting notification is not made on the display screen 7a, so even if the initial movement of the panel, which may cover the display screen 7a, is started immediately, the visibility of the setting notification will not be obstructed. Thereby, the initial processing (initial operation) that is executed when the setting of the game mode is not changed can be quickly completed, and the game can be made ready for playing as soon as possible. In S4203, it is determined whether the initial movement of the frame has been completed (S4203), and if it is determined that it has not been completed (NO in S4203), then the set time (limit time) has elapsed from the start of the initial movement of the frame. Determine whether or not (S4204). If it is determined in S4204 that the set time has not elapsed, it is determined again whether the initial movement of the frame has finished, and if it is determined that the set time has elapsed, a frame movement error notification is executed, and in S4206 Shift to processing. Further, these processes (S4203 to S4205, S4206 to S4208) are similar to the processes executed when the setting change command described above is received. Note that if it is determined in S4206 that the initial operation of moving the board has ended (YES in S4206), the process ends.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 49B [No setting change: initial processing] is a diagram showing the approximate timing of the initial processing executed when it is determined in S4101 that no setting change command has been received. According to this, the setting notification is not executed, but the initial movement of the frame (t6 → t8) and the initial movement of the board (t6 → t7) are executed (started) in parallel, and the initial movement of the frame and the initial movement of the board are executed in parallel. This indicates that the initial processing will end after both of the above are completed.

[Other aspects of initial processing 1]
Next, another aspect 1 of the initial processing will be described using FIG. 51 and FIG. 53 (AA). Descriptions of parts common to the initial processing of the first embodiment described above will be omitted, and differences will be described. In the aspect of the first embodiment described above, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (the initial movement of the board) is performed after both the setting notification and the initial movement of the frame are completed. In place of this aspect, in another aspect 1, the initial movement of the board is started after the notification of the setting of the specific notification time (5 seconds) is completed (without waiting for the initial movement of the frame to end). And so.

Specifically, S4151 to S4154 of the other aspect 1 (S4011) of the initial processing shown in FIG. 51 are the same as the initial processing of the first embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. If it is determined in S4154 that the specific notification time (5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the setting notification (YES in S4154), then a board movable initial operation start command is transmitted (S4155) to initiate the initial movement of the movable decorative member 14. Start. Then, in S4156 to S4158, the process for terminating the initial movement of the frame is performed, and in S4159 to S4160, the process for terminating the initial movement of the board is performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 53 (AA) [Settings changed: Initial processing], after the setting notification (tt1 → tt2) for a predetermined period (5 seconds) is completed, the frame movement initial operation (tt1 → tt4) is started. If it is being executed, the initial movement of the board (tt3 → tt5) is started in parallel with the initial movement of the frame without waiting for the end of the initial movement of the frame, and the initial movement of the frame and the initial movement of the board are started. Once completed, the initial processing ends. As a result, the initial processing can be completed as quickly as possible without obstructing the visibility of the setting notification due to the initial movement of the board, and the gaming machine can be brought into a playable state.

[Other aspects of initial processing 2]
Next, another aspect 2 of the initial processing will be described using FIGS. 52 and 53 (AAA). Descriptions of parts common to the other embodiment 1 described above will be omitted, and differences will be described. In Example 1 and Other Aspect 1 described above, when the setting notification for the specific notification period (5 seconds) ends, the setting notification ends and the process moves to other processing. Instead of this aspect, in another aspect 2, even after the setting notification of the specific notification period (5 seconds) is executed, the setting notification is continued, and other initial processing (frame movement initial operation and/or panel movement) is performed. The setting notification is to be terminated at the same time as the movable initial operation) is terminated. Thereby, the setting notification enables the person setting the gaming mode to reliably notify the setting.

Specifically, S4151 to S4154 of other aspect 2 (S4011) of the initial processing shown in FIG. 52 are the same as the initial processing of other aspect 1, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. Here, if it is determined in S4154 that the specific notification time (5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of setting notification (YES in S4154), setting notification will continue without ending (even if the display format is changed). (Does not matter), transmits a board movable initial operation start command for starting the board movable initial operation (S4155). Furthermore, since S4156 to S4161 are the same as the initial processing of other aspect 1, the explanation will be omitted. In other aspect 2, if it is determined in S4159 that the initial operation of moving the panel has ended (YES in S4159), a setting notification end command is used to terminate the setting notification on the display screen 7a that has been continuously executed. (S4162), and the initial processing ends. That is, in other aspect 2, as shown in FIG. 53 (AAA) [with setting change: initial processing], setting notification (s1 → s5) and frame movement initial operation (s1 → s4) are started in parallel, and , After setting notification of a specific notification period (5 seconds), initial movement of the board (s3→s5) is started. Then, even after starting the initial movement of the board, the setting notification continues on the display screen 7a, and as the initial movement of the board (the initial movement of the frame and the initial movement of the board) ends (as a trigger), It is assumed that the setting notification is ended and the initial processing is ended.

Thereby, the execution time of setting notification is extended without extending the execution time of initial processing, and it becomes possible for the person setting the game mode to reliably notify the setting. Further, in the initial operation of moving the board, although the movable decorative member 14 covers a part of the display screen 7a during a part of the initial operation, it does not cover the entire display screen 7a, and it always covers the display screen 7a during the initial operation. I don't even know. Therefore, if setting notification is performed during the initial movement of the panel, although there will be times when the visibility of the setting notification will be hindered, there will also be times when it will become visible, and it will be possible to effectively notify the setting. It is. In addition, since we have a system in place to notify settings without obstructing visibility before the initial movement of the panel begins, it is possible to more reliably notify settings that are easy to recognize. In addition, this makes it possible to complete the initial processing as quickly as possible and bring the gaming machine into a playable state without obstructing the visibility of the setting notification due to the initial movement of the board.

[Other aspects of initial processing]
Further, both the initial movement of the frame and the initial movement of the board may be started after the setting notification ends (after a specific notification time has elapsed). Thereby, it becomes possible to reliably notify the settings without the possibility that the visibility of the setting notifications will be obstructed by the movement of the decorative movable member. Further, at this time, the initial movement of the frame and the initial movement of the board may be executed in parallel, or one of them may be executed first and the other later. In addition, the initial operation of a movable decorative member refers to the inspection when the power is turned on to check whether there is any malfunction or failure in the detection sensor for controlling the movement (drive source and operating mechanism) and position of the movable decorative member, or when the power is turned on. This is an operation for moving (positioning) the movable decorative member portion to the initial position (origin position) (at the start of the game). Such processing is also called a return-to-origin operation.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, in the mode setting process (S3101) following the initial setting process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 14), it is determined whether the initialization flag is ON or not. When it is ON, that is, when the gaming machine is initialized (RAM is initialized) and started up (started up), the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is read and the gaming mode corresponding to the selection information is set. allowed for changes. On the other hand, the mode setting switch 8 The process of reading selection information is being performed. As a result of performing the recovery process based on the gaming state information stored in the backup area (161, 162), the gaming mode at the time of power outage and the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 are stored in the RAM of the main control unit 80. If the game mode is different from the corresponding game mode, the game mode setting is not changed and error processing (error notification) is executed. Further, until this error processing is completed, that is, until a match is determined in the match determination, the interrupt processing (S105) is not performed and the game cannot be started.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is extremely effective against fraud, etc., there is a risk that the operating rate of the gaming machine may decrease because the game is not started until a match is determined. Therefore, in the mode setting process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment performs the mode setting process only when the initialization flag is ON when the power is turned on, that is, when the gaming machine is initialized and started up. It is possible to read the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 and change the setting to the game mode corresponding to the selection information. On the other hand, when the initialization flag is OFF, unlike the first embodiment, the mode setting process is immediately terminated. This makes it possible to change the game mode settings when the power is turned on with initialization of the game machine, and it is not possible to change the game mode settings when the power is turned on without initializing the game machine. However, even if the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is changed, such a situation is not monitored and no error handling is performed. As a result, the game will be started in the same game mode as when the power was cut off, which was restored when the power was turned on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, in the mode setting process (S106) of the second embodiment, first check whether the initialization flag is ON or not, that is, when the power is turned on, operate the RAM clear switch 83 to clear the RAM (161, 162). Determine whether the has been initialized (S3191). If it is determined in S3191 that the initialization flag is ON (YES in S3191), the selection information of the mode setting switch is read (S3192), the gaming mode corresponding to the read selection information is set (S3193), and processing finish. In this way, when the RAM including the backup area is initialized and the gaming machine is started up by operating the RAM clear switch when the power is turned on, the selection information (setting change operation) of the mode setting switch is enabled. This makes it possible to change (set) the game mode. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3191 that the initialization flag is not ON (NO in S3191), the process ends. Note that the game modes that can be set by this mode setting process are game mode 1 to game mode 5, which are the same as in the first embodiment. Other than that, the structure and control processing of the gaming machine are the same as in the first embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

As a result, when the game is started, the game mode corresponding to the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 may be different from the actual game mode set in the game machine. However, since the game mode settings can only be changed when the power is turned on to initialize the game machine, it is possible to prevent the game mode settings from being changed unnecessarily (unauthorizedly) as much as possible. At the same time, by allowing the game to start, it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from decreasing. Furthermore, after the start of the game, any discrepancy between the actually set game mode and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch 82 can be monitored by executing the mode setting monitoring process of the first embodiment. It is also possible to do so.

Next, the gaming machine of the third embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 55 to 57. The gaming machine of the first embodiment can set any gaming mode selected from gaming modes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 9 by operating the mode setting switch 82 under specific change conditions. It is said that The gaming machine of the third embodiment selects and determines the gaming mode in a selection manner different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, the gaming machine of the third embodiment includes three (plural) types of gaming mode selecting means (gaming mode setting means) as gaming mode selecting means for selecting a gaming mode. First, as in the first embodiment, a game mode optional selection means (first game mode selection means). Second, the game mode includes game mode random selection means (second game mode selection means, random selection means) that randomly selects and sets a game mode from a plurality of predetermined game modes. Thirdly, it is provided with game mode fixed selection means (third game mode selection means, specific probability selection means) for setting the game mode to a predetermined specific game mode.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 55, the gaming machine of the third embodiment is equipped with (mounted on) a setting type switch 820 on the main control board 80. Under specific conditions, by sliding the operating section 820a of the setting type switch 820 in the left-right direction, it becomes possible to select an arbitrary setting type (gaming mode selection means). Specifically, when the leftmost [A] is selected on the operation unit 820a, the game mode arbitrary selection means (first game mode selection means) is selected as the game mode selection means. Further, when the center [B] is selected on the operation unit 820a, the game mode random selection means (second game mode selection means) is selected as the game mode selection means. Further, when selecting [C] on the right end with the operation section 820a, the fixed game mode selection means (third game mode selection means) is selected as the game mode selection means.

When the game mode optional selection hand is selected as the game mode selection means, the person who set the game mode such as a game store clerk can set any game mode, so the game store side should consider the profit balance. It is necessary to set and arrange a game machine with a high setting game mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot, and a gaming machine with a low setting game mode with a low probability of a jackpot in a well-balanced manner. In addition, if the game mode random selection means is selected as the game mode selection means, the person who set the game mode such as a game store clerk cannot grasp which game mode will be set, and the game store side This makes it difficult to manage profits. However, for players, since there is a possibility that a high setting game mode is set, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players, the interest in the game, and the gambling nature, which in turn improves the utilization rate of the game machines, and the game parlors It also becomes possible to increase profits. Further, when the game mode fixed selection means is selected as the game mode selection means, a predetermined specific game mode is set. In the third embodiment, in consideration of the profit balance between the gaming parlor side and the player side, when the gaming mode fixed selection means is selected, gaming mode 2, which is an intermediate setting, is set. As a result, although it is difficult for the game parlor to gain a large profit, it is possible to obtain a relatively balanced profit without incurring a large loss. On the other hand, from the player's perspective, there is a low possibility that profits or losses will be excessive, and it becomes possible to play a game machine with a well-balanced and moderate gambling quality.

Next, the mode setting process (S106) of the third embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 56 and 57. Description of the same parts as the mode setting process (S106) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 will be omitted. In the mode setting process (S106) of the third embodiment, first, it is determined whether the initialization flag is ON (S3101), and if it is determined that the initialization flag is not ON, that is, the backed up gaming state information has been restored (S3101). (NO), move on to processing in S3112. Since the processing in S3112 to S3119 is the same as in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is ON, that is, the gaming state information has been initialized by performing a predetermined input operation on the RAM clear switch (YES in S3101), then the mode setting key is It is determined whether it is ON, that is, whether the mode setting lock section 92 is in the ON state (S3102). If it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting lock unit 92 is in the OFF state, that is, the setting key is not operated (NO in S3102), the process moves to S3111. The processing in S3111 is the same as in the first embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

If it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting lock 92 is in the ON state, that is, that the setting key is being operated (YES in S3102), then a random number for setting change is obtained (S3149), and the mode in S3150 is determined. The process moves to setting processing 2 (S3150). Here, the "random number for setting change" is a random number used when the game mode random selection means is selected as the game mode selection means. This random number for setting change is composed of the value of a counter that is updated at a predetermined period from power-on, and the value of this counter obtained at the execution timing of S3149 is referred to as the random number for setting change.

In mode setting processing 2 (S3150), first, the selection information of the setting type switch is read (S3151), and then it is determined whether the setting type selected by the setting type switch 820 is setting type A (gaming mode arbitrary selection means). (S3152). The CPU of the main control section 80 determines the setting type selected by the operating section 820a of the setting type switch 820. If it is determined in S3152 that the setting type selected by the operation unit 820a of the setting type switch 820 is [A] (YES in S3152), the setting type A flag indicates that the gaming mode has been set by the gaming mode arbitrary selection means. is turned on (S3152), and the process moves to S3154. The processing of S3154 to S3159, specifically, the processing of setting the game mode in the "gaming mode change state" and setting an arbitrary gaming mode during that period, is the same as the processing of the first embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Thereby, the person who sets the game mode, such as a game clerk, operates the operating section 82a of the mode setting switch 82 to set any game mode selected from game modes 1 to 5.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3152 that the setting type selected by the setting type switch 820 is not setting type A (NO in S3152), then the setting type selected by the setting type switch 820 is set type B (game mode random selection means) (S3162). If it is determined in S3162 that the setting type selected by the operation unit 820a of the setting type switch 820 is [B] (YES in S3162), a setting type B flag indicating that the gaming mode has been set by the gaming mode random selection means is turned ON (S3163), and the process moves to S3164. In S3164, a gaming mode is set based on the random value for setting change acquired in S3149 (S3164), and information indicating that the gaming mode has been randomly set by the gaming mode random selection means is displayed on the information display section 88. (S3165) and proceeds to the process of S3169. As a result, a game mode randomly selected from game modes 1 to 5 is set regardless of the intention of a game mode setting person such as a game clerk.

Here, "set the gaming mode based on the acquired random number for setting change" means that the random number for setting change consists of values from 0 to 99, and the acquired random number for setting change is 0 to 99. If the number is 19, set to gaming mode 1, if the obtained random number for setting change is 20 to 39, set to gaming mode 2, and if the obtained random number for setting change is 40 to 59, set to gaming mode 3. If the set and obtained random number value for setting change is 60 to 79, game mode 4 is set, and if the obtained random number value for setting change is 80 to 99, game mode 5 is set. Furthermore, the "information indicating that the setting is random" displayed in S3165 is, for example, displaying the characters [RAND] (indicating random) using the 7-segment display section of the first to fourth information display sections. You can. In addition, in the case of random setting, the set game mode is not displayed because the game store staff confirms that the game mode has been set to a disadvantage to the game store, and then sets the game mode to a game mode that is convenient for them. This is to prevent random settings from being repeated by turning the power on and off many times until the settings are correct. This makes it possible to maintain fairness between the player side and the game parlor side when the game mode is set by the game mode random selection means.

In addition, if it is determined in S3162 that the setting type selected by the operation section 820a of the setting type switch 820 is not [B], that is, the selected setting type is [C] (NO in S3162), the game mode is fixed. The setting type C flag indicating that the gaming mode has been set by the selection means is turned ON (S3166), and the process moves to S3167. In S3167, game mode 2, which is a predetermined fixed game mode, is set (S3167), the set game mode (game mode 2) is displayed on the information display section 88 (S3168), and the process proceeds to S3169. . Note that the display mode of the information display section is [--F2], where F is information indicating a fixed FIX. As a result, the game mode setter, such as a game clerk, cannot select any game mode, and game mode 2 is forcibly set.

In S3169, it is determined whether the mode setting key is OFF, that is, whether the setting key inserted into the mode setting lock has been returned to the OFF position (S3169), and if it is determined that it has been returned to the OFF position (YES in S3169). , the process moves to S3160. If it is determined in S3169 that the game has not been returned to the OFF position (NO in S3169), the process in S43169 is repeatedly executed and the transition to the "playable state" is not made. In S3160, the mode change flag is turned OFF to end the "gaming mode change state" (S3160), the aforementioned setting change flag is turned ON (S3161), a setting type specifying command is set (S3170), and the process ends.

Here, in the third embodiment, it is determined by the "setting change flag" that the backed up gaming state information has been erased (initialized) and the setting of the gaming mode has been changed, and the "setting type identification command" is used to determine whether the It becomes possible to determine in which setting type the setting change of the game mode was made. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, based on the "setting type specifying command", it is assumed to notify which setting type the game mode has been set. As mentioned above, the display mode on the information display section 88 when the game mode is set is different depending on which setting type the game mode is set, so the game store staff etc. can use this display mode (notification mode). You can check which setting type was used by looking at the .

In addition, the "setting type specifying command" is used to inform the player which setting type the game mode has been set to. For example, it is possible to notify the setting type in a specifiable (predictable) notification manner using a frame lamp, board lamp, or image display device provided on the front side of the gaming machine. For example, by changing the emitting color, emitting pattern, blinking speed, etc. of the lamp, by changing the background color, background type, display character, text, etc. of the liquid crystal, and by changing the sound output from the speaker, It is possible to specify (predict) which setting type the game mode has been set with. Further, the notification mode in which the setting type can be specified continues at least after the setting of the game mode is changed until the game is started (fluctuating display of the first special symbol). Alternatively, a "setting type specifying command" may be transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing, and a display unit or a speaker controlled by the sub-control unit 90 may be used to make a notification that allows the setting type to be specified. Of course, a display unit that can be controlled by the main control unit 80 may be used to provide notification that allows the setting type to be specified.

As another aspect, the display may continue until at least the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) after the setting of the game mode is changed. Further, as another aspect, it may be continued at least until a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) has elapsed after the setting of the game mode is changed. Furthermore, these modes may be combined to terminate the notification based on whichever condition is satisfied first. As a result, if there is a game machine whose settings have been changed, it is possible to notify the player who plays the game machine for the first time after the game store opens, which setting type has been changed for that game machine. becomes. This allows players to select the gaming machine they want to play on based on this information, making it possible to increase the number of players immediately after the store opens.

As described above, the setting type switch 820 is operated with the power turned off. Then, with any setting type (A to C) selected by operating the operation unit 820a, the power is turned on. This makes it possible to select a game mode according to any setting type. In addition, in order to change the setting of the gaming mode with any setting type, as in the first embodiment, select the setting type with the power OFF, turn the mode setting lock ON, and then It is necessary to turn on the power while the clear switch is turned on.

This makes it possible to set the game mode in a wide variety of ways, and the player can also increase his or her taste in selecting the game machine on which to play, depending on the settings on the game parlor side. This also increases the interest in the game.

Next, the gaming machine of Example 4 will be explained using FIG. 58. The gaming machine of the first embodiment includes a notification section that notifies the power-on mode (initialization and no setting change, initialization and setting change, or initialization and no setting change); The mode was mainly aimed at game store clerks who are the ones who turn on the power. In addition to this, in the fourth embodiment, it is possible to notify the player of the power-on mode (initialization and no setting change, initialization and setting change, or initialization and no setting change).

As shown in the power-on notification process (S107) of Embodiment 4 in FIG. is set (S5108), and the process moves to S5103. Further, following S5106, a display command is set to notify that "initialization and setting changes have been made" (S5109), and the process moves to S5103. Also, following S5107, a display command is set to notify that "the game has not been initialized and the settings have not been changed (gaming status information has been restored)" (S5110), and the process moves to S5103. ing. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

In the fourth embodiment, a control process (not shown) is used to issue a display command to notify that "initialized but settings have not been changed" and a display command to notify that "initialized and settings have not been changed." or a display command for notifying that "the game has not been initialized and the settings have not been changed (gaming status information has been restored)" to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing; A display unit or a speaker controlled by the sub-control unit 90 may be used to provide a specifiable notification of the power-on mode. That is, different notification modes are executed depending on the power-on mode. Of course, a display unit that can be controlled by the main control unit 80 may be used to provide notification that allows the setting type to be specified.

Furthermore, in order to notify the player, this notification mode continues at least after the setting of the game mode is changed until the game is started (fluctuating display of the first special symbol). As another aspect, the display may continue until at least the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) after the setting of the game mode is changed. Further, as another aspect, it may be continued at least until a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) has elapsed after the setting of the game mode is changed. Further, these aspects may be combined to terminate the notification based on whichever condition is satisfied first. As a result, if there is a game machine whose settings have been changed, it is possible to notify the player who plays the game machine for the first time after the game store opens, which setting type has been changed for that game machine. becomes. This allows players to select the gaming machine they want to play on based on this information, making it possible to increase the number of players immediately after the store opens.

In addition, as another aspect, an operation switch (not shown) is provided, and by operating the operation switch (operation section), a game clerk or the like can set whether or not to notify the player of the power-on mode. You may also do so.

Next, the gaming machine of Example 5 will be explained using FIGS. 59 to 64. The circuit configuration of Example 5 (mainly the main control board 80, payout control board 90, and power supply board 109) is partially different from the circuit configuration of Example 1 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The circuit configuration of the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 59, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. Note that descriptions of parts common to Example 1 will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, a power supply board 109 is provided that supplies driving power to the main control board 80, payout control board 110, other control boards (sub control board 90, image control board 100), etc. We are prepared. In the first embodiment, by performing a predetermined input operation on the power supply board 109, the storage contents of the backup area provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 and the backup area provided in the RAM of the payout control unit 110 are erased. A RAM clear switch 83 is provided for initialization. In the fifth embodiment, instead of this, a RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 (also referred to as a "specific switch") is used, which has both the functions of the RAM clear switch 83 of the first embodiment and the function of the mode setting switch 82 of the first embodiment. ). Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the main control board 80 does not include the mode setting switch 82 for changing the setting of the gaming mode (setting a predetermined gaming mode) (see FIG. 59).

The RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 is a push-type switch, and its structure is similar to the RAM clear switch 83 of the first embodiment. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the RAM clear switch of the first embodiment has both the functions of a RAM clear switch and a mode setting switch. This makes it possible to reduce costs and increase the common parts of the board and its mounted parts (common parts) between gaming machines that have a gaming mode setting function and gaming machines that do not have a gaming mode setting function. it becomes possible to

Further, the main control board 80 (main control section) and the payout control board 110 (payout control section) of the fifth embodiment have backup areas 161 and 162 in the RAM, respectively, as in the first embodiment. The backup area 161 of the main control board 80 and the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 are backed up by a backup power supply (backup voltage) included in the power supply section of the power supply board 109. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine is stopped due to a power outage or a power OFF operation, the power supply will continue to operate for a specified period of time (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). The contents (gaming state information) of the backup targets (memory retention targets) stored in these RAMs are saved (memory retention). A means for storing and retaining backup target information (data) stored in the backup areas 161 and 162 using this backup power source is referred to as a "memory retaining means". In addition, the means for storing and holding the backup target information (data) stored in the backup area 161 of the main control board 80 is referred to as a "first storage holding unit", and the backup target information (data) stored in the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 is referred to as a "first storage holding unit". The means for storing and retaining data) is referred to as "second storage and retaining means". The stored backup target information (data) is provided in the RAM of each control board 80, 110 as a backup target information save area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the backup area 161 of the main control board 80 includes an initialization area 171 including a first game information storage section, and a non-initialization area 172 including a setting storage section 174 and a base storage section 175. have. Note that the initialization area 171 and/or the non-initialization area 172 may include other areas. In the initialization area 171, an operator such as a game store clerk arbitrarily operates the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 in a predetermined manner to erase stored (retained) backup target information (data). This is an area that can be initialized. That is, the initialization area 171 is an area that can be initialized at the discretion of the operator. By initializing, the player can start playing the game machine after initialization under the same conditions (0 pending, special symbols and normal symbols pending and no fluctuation display, low probability low base state, etc.). It becomes possible.

Further, the non-initialized area 172 is an area where backup target information (data) cannot be erased even if an operator such as a game store clerk operates the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830. That is, the non-initialized area 172 is an area that cannot be initialized at the discretion of the operator. Note that even in the non-initialized area 172, if there is an abnormality in the information (data) stored in the non-initialized area 172, part or all of it is initialized. This is an area that cannot be initialized using a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear/mode setting switch 830). Therefore, when initializing using the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830, the initialization target (erasing target) can be limited to the information stored in the initialization area.

Further, as the initialization area 171 of the main control board 80, a first game information storage section 173 is provided. The first game information storage unit 173 includes at least data indicating the game state (probability of winning or failing of special symbols/normal symbols (high probability or low probability), base state (high base state or low base state)), special Data indicating the number of reserved symbols, data indicating the reservation information of special symbols (judgment results, fluctuation patterns, etc.), data indicating the number of regular symbols reserved, data indicating the reservation information of ordinary symbols (judgment results, fluctuation patterns, etc.), special Data indicating the validity judgment result of the symbol/normal symbol, remaining period of high probability state, remaining period of high base state, etc. In other words, data according to the control state of the main control unit (special symbol status flag, normal symbol status flag, (value of a pending storage counter, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are stored. The data stored in this first game information storage section is referred to as "gaming information." Furthermore, when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected, the data stored in the first game information storage section 173 is retained (backed up) by the memory retention means (first memory retention means), and when the power is restored. , the stored data is recovered. This data recovery means is referred to as "game information recovery means (first game information recovery means)".

The main control board 80 also includes a setting storage section 174 and a base storage section 175 as the non-initialized area 172. The setting storage section 174 stores information indicating the set game mode (also referred to as "game mode information" or "setting information"), and the base storage section 175 stores the base information described in the first embodiment. Information (base values (first base value, second base value)) is stored. Also, the data (setting information) stored in this setting storage section 174 is stored when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected. The memory is retained (backed up) by the retaining means (second memory retaining means), and when the power is restored, the retained data (setting information) is restored. The data (base information) stored in the base storage section 175 is stored and retained by the memory retention means (third memory retention means) when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected. (backup), and when the power is restored, the stored data (base information) is restored. This data restoration means is referred to as "game information restoration means (third game information restoration means)".

Further, as described above, the setting information stored in the setting storage section 174 and the base information stored in the base storage section 175 are initialized by operating the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 to initialize the RAM of the main control board 80. It is not erased (not initialized) even if the data is changed. In other words, it is not subject to initialization operations. Note that the setting information stored in the setting storage section 174 can be changed by performing a predetermined setting change operation, but the base information stored in the base storage section 175 cannot be changed. , the operator cannot arbitrarily change (initialize) unless an abnormality occurs.

Further, in the initialization area 176 of the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110, similarly to the above-mentioned initialization area 171, an operator such as a game store clerk can arbitrarily clear the RAM and use the mode setting switch 830 in a predetermined manner. This is an area where stored (stored) backup target information (data) can be erased and initialized by performing the following operations. That is, by the operator arbitrarily operating the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 in a predetermined manner, both the initialization area 171 of the main control board 80 and the initialization area 176 of the payout control board 110 are initialized. Both areas are initialized. From this, players can start playing games with the gaming machine after initialization under the same conditions (0 pending, no pending and variable display of special and normal symbols, low probability low base state, prize balls, etc.) It becomes possible.

Further, the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 has an initialization area 176 including a second game information storage section 177. Note that the initialization area 176 may include other areas, and the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 may include a non-initialization area for storing information not to be initialized (information regarding gaming profits and prize balls). may be provided. This second game information storage section 177 stores at least data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls (unpaid prize ball information). The data stored in this second gaming information storage section is referred to as "gaming information", "prize ball information", or "gaming profit information". Furthermore, when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected, the data stored in the second game information storage section 177 is stored (backed up) by the memory holding means (fourth memory holding means), and when the power is restored, the data is stored in the second game information storage section 177. , the stored data is recovered. This data recovery means is referred to as "game information recovery means (fourth game information recovery means)".

Here, when only the power switch 84 is turned on in a state where power is not supplied to the pachinko game machine 1 of the fifth embodiment (power OFF state), power supply voltage is supplied to the power supply board 109, and power supply voltage is supplied to the power supply board 109. The necessary driving power is supplied to various control boards. Then, the information (data) when the power is turned off (when the power decreases) is normally stored (memory retention) in each backup area (first game information storage section, setting storage section, base storage section, second game information storage section). ), (if there is no abnormality in the backup data), based on the information (data), the state (gaming state) at the time of power OFF (low power) is restored and you can play. (This is also referred to as "gaming state restoration means," "gaming information restoration means," or "gaming state information restoration means.") On the other hand, when turning on the power switch 84, if the power switch 84 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 for a predetermined period (switching operation from OFF to ON), the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 is The input information (RAM clear signal) of the mode setting switch 830 is input to the main control unit 80 and the payout control unit 110, and the initialization areas 171 and 176 (first game If there is information (data) stored in the information storage unit, second game information storage unit), the information (data) stored in the initialization areas 171 and 176 can be erased and initialized before playing the game. (This is also referred to as "gaming information initialization means"). This makes it possible to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1 to its initial state.

In addition, by operating the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 in the predetermined manner described above to initialize (initialization operation), the first game information stored in the memory retention means (first memory retention means) Game information in the storage section 173 (information indicating the results of special symbol validity judgment, etc.), and game information (unpaid prize balls) in the second game information storage section 177 stored and retained in the memory retention means (fourth memory retention means). The setting information of the setting storage unit 174 that is stored and retained by the memory retention means (second memory retention means) and the base of the base storage unit 175 that is stored and retained by the memory retention means (third memory retention means) It becomes possible to restore the information and initialize it.

Further, the method of changing the game mode (change operation method) in the fifth embodiment is approximately the same as that in the first embodiment, but in the fifth embodiment, the main control board 80 is not equipped with a mode setting switch, and the main control board 80 is not equipped with a mode setting switch. Since the gaming mode is set (setting operation) using the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 on the board 109, the method is partially different. The method of changing the game mode in the fifth embodiment will be explained below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

First, with the power of the pachinko game machine OFF, insert a setting key (not shown) into the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock 89, and operate (rotate) the setting key from the OFF to ON position to enter the mode. Turn on the setting lock section 89. Next, with the power still in the OFF state and the setting key operated to the ON position, press and hold the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 while turning the power switch 84 from OFF to ON. do. That is, the power is turned on with both the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 and the mode setting lock 89 turned on. As a result, power is supplied to the gaming machine, the gaming machine starts up, and enters a "gaming mode change state" in which the gaming mode setting can be changed to an arbitrary setting.

If there is setting information in the setting storage section 174 stored and held by the memory holding means (second storage holding means), a value indicating the gaming mode corresponding to the setting information is displayed on the information display section 88. In the "game mode change state", when changing the game mode displayed on the information display section 88, that is, the currently set game mode, the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 is pressed. For example, if the currently set gaming mode is gaming mode 3, the information display section 88 displays [---3]. When the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 is pressed once in this state, the display mode of the information display section 88 is changed to [---4]. After that, each time the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 is pressed once, the change changes as follows: [---5] → [---1] → [---2] → [---3]... do. Then, with the information display unit 88 displaying the operator's desired game mode (for example, game mode 4), the game mode is determined and set by returning the setting key from the ON position to the OFF position. . As a result, game mode 4 is set, and the pachinko game machine enters a state in which it can start games (interruption processing such as special symbol validity determination, etc.). The means for selecting a game mode using the RAM clear/mode setting switch in this way is also referred to as a "game mode selection means" or a "judgment probability selection means." Further, the means for determining and setting the selected game mode is also referred to as "game mode setting means" or "judgment probability setting means."

On the other hand, when the power is turned on for the first time (after manufacturing), when the power is turned on for the first time after replacing the main control board 80, or when there is an abnormality in the setting information in the setting storage section 174, none of the setting information is stored. The value indicating the gaming mode is not displayed. In addition, the value [----] is displayed on the information display section 88, and unless the RAM clear/mode setting switch is pressed at least once to select one of the gaming modes, the gaming mode will not be set. Not done.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the main control main processing of the fifth embodiment will be explained using FIG. 60. The explanation will focus on the differences from the main control main processing of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 12, and the explanation of common processing will be omitted. In the main control main processing of the fifth embodiment, after the processing of S108 and S109, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the storage information (base information) of the base storage section 175 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 mentioned above. A base storage unit determination process is performed (S111), and the process moves to S110. This base storage unit determination process (S111) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter (after the start of the game). Details of the base storage unit determination process will be described later.

[Mode setting processing]
Next, the mode setting process (S106) of the fifth embodiment will be explained using FIG. 61. The explanation will focus on the differences from the mode setting process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14, and the explanation of common processes will be omitted. In the mode setting process of the fifth embodiment, if it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is ON (YES in S3101) and that the mode setting key is ON in S3102 (YES in S3102), then: The setting information stored in the setting storage unit (the setting information stored and held in the memory holding means) is read, and if there is stored setting information, the value indicating the gaming mode corresponding to the setting information is displayed as information. displayed in the section. Although not shown in FIG. 61, if the setting information (normal setting information) is not stored in the setting storage unit or if there is an abnormality in the stored setting information, any setting information If it is not stored, a value (symbol) indicating the state (that no game mode is selected) is displayed ([----] as described above).

Next, following S3103 and S3104, it is determined whether there is an operation (input) of the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 (S3105). If it is determined in S3105 that there is an input to the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 (YES in S3105), the setting information indicating the selected gaming mode is updated and stored (S3106), and the information display section is displayed after the update. The game mode is updated to a value indicating the game mode corresponding to the game mode and displayed (S3107), and the process moves to S3108. Although not shown in FIG. 61, in a state where no setting information is stored (a state in which [----] is displayed), switch the mode setting key from ON to OFF to switch to the gaming mode. When the changing state is ended, the pachinko game machine remains in a non-playable state and does not enter into a game starting state. That is, in order to enter the game start state (set any game mode) from a state where no setting information is stored, the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 must be pressed at least once in the game mode change state. It is necessary to perform an operation (input).

In addition, if it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is not ON (NO in S3101), then a setting storage unit determination process (described later) is performed (S3132), and a gaming mode corresponding to the setting information in the setting storage unit is set. , the process moves to S3118. Further, if it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting key is not ON (NO in S3102), then a setting storage section determination process to be described later is performed (S3134), and the process proceeds to S3111.

[Settings storage section determination process]
Next, the setting storage unit determination process (S3132) of the fifth embodiment will be described using FIG. 62. The setting storage unit determination process (S3132) is a process executed in the mode setting process (S106) of the fifth embodiment, and is executed when it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is not ON (NO in S3101). Ru. First, check data related to the setting information stored in the setting storage section of the main control section is calculated (S3301), and it is determined whether the check data is normal (S3302). That is, in S3302, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the setting information stored in the setting storage section stored by the memory holding means. A means for determining whether there is any abnormality in the setting information stored in the setting storage section (also referred to as "setting probability storage means") when starting this power supply is also referred to as a "first abnormality determining means." Further, the means for determining whether or not there is any abnormality in the game information stored in the first game information storage section when starting power supply is also referred to as "second abnormality determining means." Further, the means for determining whether or not there is any abnormality in the game information stored in the second game information storage section when starting power supply is also referred to as "third abnormality determining means." Further, the means for determining whether or not there is any abnormality in the base information stored in the base storage section when starting power supply is also referred to as "fourth abnormality determining means."

In S3302, the check data is normal, that is, there is no abnormality in the setting information stored in the setting storage unit (setting information stored and held by the memory holding means) (some normal setting information is stored). If it is determined that (YES in S3302), the process ends and the process moves to S3133 of the mode setting process (S106). On the other hand, there is an abnormality in the check data (including cases in which no setting information is stored), that is, information indicating normal gaming modes (gaming modes 1 to 5) is not stored, or there is no setting information. If it is determined that the setting information is not stored (NO in S3302), then the storage area (setting information) of the setting storage unit is initialized (S3303), the gaming mode unset flag is turned ON (S3304), and the gaming mode setting instruction is issued. Sends a notification command (S3305) and enters an infinite loop. By sending a gaming mode setting instruction command (sub control unit, etc.), a message such as "Please set the gaming mode" is displayed on a predetermined display section (for example, the display screen 7a or the display section on the back side of the gaming board). do. As a result, the game clerk or the like recognizes that it is necessary to set the game mode using the game mode setting means by operating the RAM clear/mode setting switch or the like. Furthermore, by creating an infinite loop after S3305, it is impossible to start the game without setting the game mode (setting the game in a state where it is impossible to play). This makes it possible to reliably prevent players and gaming parlors from suffering unexpected disadvantages due to unintended gaming modes being set. Note that the setting storage unit determination process in S3134 is also similar to the setting storage unit determination process in S3132, so description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

Next, the base storage unit determination process (S111) of the fifth embodiment will be described using FIG. 63. In the base storage unit determination process (S111), check data related to the base value stored in the base storage unit of the main control unit is first calculated (S3401), and it is determined whether the check data is normal (S3402). That is, in S3402, it is determined whether or not there is any abnormality in the base information stored in the base storage section stored by the storage holding means. In S3402, it is determined that the check data is normal, that is, there is no abnormality in the base information stored in the base storage unit (base information stored in the storage means) (normal base information is stored). If so (YES in S3402), the base information stored in the base storage unit (base information stored by the memory retention means), which is the base value at the time of the previous power outage, is displayed on the information display unit (S3403); Finish processing. On the other hand, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the check data (including cases where no base information is stored), that is, information indicating a normal base value is not stored or no base value is stored. If so (NO in S3402), then the storage area (base information) of the base storage unit is initialized (S3403), a base storage unit abnormality notification command is sent (S3405), and the initial base value (specifically, “0 ") is displayed (S3406), and the process ends.

By sending the base storage unit abnormality notification command (sub-control unit, etc.), a message such as “There is an abnormality in the base value, please check” will be displayed on a specified display unit (for example, the display screen 7a or the display on the back side of the game board). Display message. As a result, game store clerks and the like recognize the necessity of inspecting the base display at an opportunity. It should be noted that the abnormality regarding the base display does not directly affect the game, so it is possible to start the game. Alternatively, the game may be set in a non-playable state and the game may be disabled until the abnormality is resolved.

Next, the power-off monitoring process (S209) of the fifth embodiment will be described using FIG. 64. The explanation will focus on the differences from the power-off monitoring process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 44, and the explanation of common processes will be omitted. In the power-off monitoring process (S209) of the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that a power-off signal has been input (YES in S2651), the data (state, game information) is stored in the RAM save area of the main control unit (S2652), and then the data (state, game information) currently stored in the second game information storage unit is stored in the RAM save area of the payout control unit. (S2653), then stores and holds the data (setting information) stored in the current setting storage in the RAM save area of the main control unit (S2654), and then stores it in the current base storage. The stored data (base information) is stored and held in the save area of the RAM of the main control unit (S2655), the power supply flag is turned ON (S2656), and the process ends. This makes it possible to reliably store and hold the backup target data stored in the backup area in the event of a power outage.

As explained above, in the fifth embodiment, gaming information, setting information, and base information are stored in different storage areas, and only the gaming information is targeted for arbitrary initialization processing using the RAM clear and mode setting switch. There is. Even if the gaming information is initialized, if there is no abnormality in the stored setting information, the gaming mode can be set to a value based on the setting information, and the gaming mode setting operation can be performed again at the time of initialization. This eliminates the need for this function, streamlining the settings of gaming machines. The same applies if there is an abnormality in the stored game information. Further, by excluding setting information and base information from any initialization processing using the RAM clear/mode setting switch, it is possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

Next, the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 65 to 68. The circuit configuration of Example 6 (mainly the main control board 80, payout control board 90, and power supply board 109) is almost the same as the circuit configuration of Example 5 (see FIG. 59), and the similar configuration will not be described in detail. The explanation will be omitted. The sixth embodiment differs in some configurations from the first to fifth embodiments, and the settings of the game mode (judgment probability) are changed in a predetermined part (location) of the gaming machine. a confirmation display section 181 that can notify that a change has been made or that the gaming mode (judgment probability) set in the gaming machine is being confirmed (that the gaming machine is in a gaming mode confirmation state); 182 and 183.

As shown in FIG. 65, the main control section 80 provided on the back side of the gaming machine includes an information display section 88 (second setting display section) and a mode setting lock section 89 necessary for changing and confirming settings of the gaming mode. It is provided. Further, the power supply control unit 109 (power supply control board), which is also provided on the back side of the gaming machine, is provided with a power switch 84 and a RAM clear/mode setting switch 830, which are necessary for changing and confirming the settings of the game mode.

As shown in FIG. 66, a second confirmation display section 182 (third setting display section) is provided on the front side of the game board (game machine) (front side of the game machine). When the game machine is in a game mode changing state, characters ``Setting in progress'' are displayed on the second confirmation display section 182 in order to notify the person in front of the game machine, such as the player and the game store clerk, of the state. Note that any display mode may be used as long as it indicates that the game mode is being changed. Although not shown, when the gaming machine is in the gaming mode confirmation state, the second confirmation display section 182 displays the message "Confirming ” etc. may be displayed. Similarly, any display mode may be used as long as it indicates the game mode confirmation state.

Further, although the structure of the second confirmation display section 182 will be described later, the second confirmation display section 182 is configured to display the game machine frame (front frame 51, main body frame 52, and outer frame 53) on the front of the game board in a closed state. It is placed in a position where it can be visually recognized during the game being played. Therefore, it is not efficient to use the second confirmation display section 182 only in the "gaming mode change state" or "gaming mode confirmation state", that is, during non-gaming (playing disabled state). During the game, the second confirmation display section 182 is also used as a game effect display section. For example, when a game performance with high reliability of jackpot (reach, etc.) is being executed, characters such as "chance" are displayed. As a result, during non-gaming, the game mode change state and game mode confirmation state are notified, and during play, game effects are displayed to notify the jackpot reliability (possibility of jackpot execution), and the gaming machine It is possible to switch the display content depending on the state (not playing, playing), and to reliably notify players of necessary information.

Note that the front side of the gaming machine refers to the side facing the player when the gaming machine is installed in an island facility of a gaming parlor (hall) and a game is played. That is, the side shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side of the gaming machine. In addition, the back side of the gaming machine refers to the side opposite to the front side of the gaming machine, on which a control board and the like are provided. That is, the side shown in FIG. 2 is referred to as the back side of the gaming machine. In addition, to change or confirm the settings of the game mode, normally, the opening/closing frame (the main frame 52 and the front frame 51) is opened with respect to the outer frame 53 fixed to the island equipment (in the state shown in FIG. 67). It will be done. Specifically, the opening/closing frame is opened, and the power switch 84, RAM clear/mode setting switch 830, mode setting lock 89, setting key, etc. on the back side of the gaming machine are accessed from the front of the gaming machine, and the predetermined setting key is accessed from the front of the gaming machine. This is done by executing a predetermined operation mode. However, there is a possibility that the setting of the gaming mode may be changed by some method (for example, by opening the gaming machine set on the back side) while the gaming machine is in the closed state. Even in such a case, the player can easily and reliably know that the player is in the "game mode change state" or "game mode confirmation state" by checking the display format of the second confirmation display section 183. becomes possible. In addition to this, when the settings of the gaming mode are changed (or when the settings are reset), the player is notified that the settings have been changed (the settings have been reset). Good too.

This makes it difficult for game parlors to change the game mode without the consent of the player after the game has started during business hours, etc., and it becomes possible to create gaming machines that are fair for both the game parlor and the players. . Further, the display of the second confirmation display section 182 may be controlled by the main control section 80. As a result, the display can be controlled by the main control section 80 that controls the setting change of the game mode, and the display of the second confirmation display section 182 can be controlled more reliably, and fraud such as blocking the display can be prevented as much as possible. It becomes possible. Further, it is provided with an abnormality determination means for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in the second confirmation display section 182 (whether the display can be controlled normally), and if there is an abnormality in the second confirmation display section 182, the abnormality has occurred. A speaker or other display unit may be used to notify the player that the game is in progress, or it may be possible to disable the game mode setting change if there is an abnormality. Of course, the display of the second confirmation display section 182 may be controlled by the sub-control section 90.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, first confirmation display sections 181a and 181b (first setting display sections) are provided on the side surface of the gaming machine (on the side surface of the gaming machine). Like the second confirmation display section 182, the first confirmation display section 181 indicates that the setting of the gaming mode (judgment probability) has been changed, that the setting has been changed, or that the setting of the gaming machine has been changed. Displays information such as the fact that the game mode (judgment probability) currently in progress is being confirmed (the game machine is in the game mode confirmation state), and indicates to the player, game store clerk, or other person in front of the game machine that the game machine is in the relevant state. Notify players, etc. Furthermore, as described above, the setting of the game mode is usually changed by opening the opening/closing frame (including the main body frame 52 and the front frame 51) with respect to the outer frame 53 fixed to the island equipment (as shown in FIG. 67). (in a state) In such an open state, the game board 2 etc. rotates and the angle from which it is viewed from the player changes, and the player can see the second confirmation display section 182 and the performance symbols displayed toward the front (front) of the game machine. The display mode of the display section 7b becomes difficult to see (becomes difficult to visually recognize), and it becomes difficult to accurately grasp and recognize the display contents.

The opening/closing frames (the main body frame 52 and the front frame 51) are rotatable by being pivotally supported by the outer frame at one end, and the first confirmation display parts 181a and 181b are opened at the other end which is not pivotally supported. It is provided on the side. Thereby, the first confirmation display section 181 (181a, 181b) becomes easy to see when the gaming machine frame (open/close frame) is in the open state. As a result, when the gaming machine frame (opening/closing frame) is in the closed state, the player etc. can confirm that the setting of the gaming mode (judgment probability) has been changed through the second confirmation display section 182 or the production symbol display section. It confirms that the settings have been changed or that the gaming mode (judgment probability) set on the gaming machine is being confirmed, and if the gaming machine frame (opening/closing frame) is in the open state, the first confirmation display is displayed. The settings of the gaming mode (judgment probability) have been changed by the units 181a and 181b, the settings have been changed, or the gaming mode (judgment probability) set in the gaming machine is being confirmed. etc. can be confirmed. In addition, this makes it possible to reliably check and understand the status of the gaming machine, such as setting changes, whether the gaming machine frame (opening/closing frame) is closed or open. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, a plurality of first confirmation display sections 181 are provided on the sides (side surfaces) of the gaming machine frame (openable/closable frame) that can be opened and closed. Although the first confirmation display section 181a is visible from the front of the gaming machine even when the gaming machine frame (opening/closing frame) is in the closed state, it is difficult to understand the display contents from the front of the gaming machine (difficult to see). It is provided on the side surface of the front frame 51 at a suitable position. That is, since the display angles (display directions) of the performance symbol display section and the first confirmation display section 181a are different, it is difficult to simultaneously grasp the display contents of the performance symbol display section and the first confirmation display section 181a. It is difficult (difficult to see).

Further, the first confirmation display section 181b is provided on the back side of the main body frame 52 (including the members attached to the main body frame), which is in an invisible position when the gaming machine frame (opening/closing frame) is in the closed state. ing. When the gaming machine frame (opening/closing frame) is in the closed state, the side part of the main body frame 52 where the first confirmation display section 181b is provided is covered with the back side of the gaming machine and is not exposed to the front of the gaming machine. The first confirmation display section 181b is exposed at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine when the gaming machine frame (opening/closing frame) is rotated by a predetermined angle or more to bring it into a relatively wide open state. In other words, when the gaming machine frame (opening/closing frame) is turned to the open state to the extent that the gaming mode setting change operation (setting confirmation operation) can be performed from the front side of the gaming machine, the first confirmation display section The display contents of 181b are easily visible from the front side of the gaming machine.

In this way, by providing the plurality of first confirmation display parts 181a and 181b at different positions on the side of the gaming machine frame (opening/closing frame), it is possible to Regardless of whether the game mode (judgment probability) is large or where the player is (waiting place), the settings of the gaming mode (judgment probability) have been changed, and that the settings have been changed. Alternatively, it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the game mode (judgment probability) set in the game machine is being checked.

Further, the first confirmation display sections 181a and 181b may be display-controlled by the main control section 80 similarly to the second confirmation display section 182. As a result, the display can be controlled by the main control unit 80 that controls the setting change of the gaming mode, and the display of the first confirmation display unit 181 can be controlled more reliably, and fraud such as blocking the display can be prevented as much as possible. It becomes possible. In addition, similarly to the second confirmation display section 182, the first confirmation display section 181 is provided with an abnormality determination means for determining whether there is an abnormality in the first confirmation display section 181 (whether the display can be controlled normally). In some cases, the occurrence of the abnormality may be notified through a speaker or other display unit, or if there is an abnormality, it may be impossible to change the setting of the game mode. Of course, the display of the first confirmation display section 181 may be controlled by the sub-control section 90.

Regarding the display mode of the first confirmation display sections 181a and 181b, when the gaming machine is in a gaming mode change state, the first confirmation display section 181a, 181b The characters "Setting in progress" are displayed on the confirmation display sections 181a and 181b. Note that any display mode may be used as long as it indicates that the game mode is being changed. Although not shown, when the gaming machine is in the gaming mode confirmation state, the first confirmation display sections 181a and 181b display " It is also possible to display text such as "Confirming". Similarly, any display mode may be used as long as it indicates the game mode confirmation state.

In addition, since the first confirmation display sections 181a and 181b are provided in positions that are difficult or impossible to see from the front of the gaming machine, the "game mode change state" and "game mode confirmation state" are in the display state (display ON state). ), and when the game becomes possible, it becomes a non-display state (display OFF state). That is, the first confirmation display sections 181a and 181b do not display game effects during the game.

Further, as another aspect of the display control of the first confirmation display sections 181a and 181b, the display control (display state control timing) of the first confirmation display section 181a and the first confirmation display section 181b may be made different. Specifically, the first confirmation display section 181a is provided at a position that is visible from the front of the gaming machine even when the opening/closing frame is in the closed state, and the first confirmation display section 181b is provided at a position that is visible from the front of the gaming machine when the opening/closing frame is in the closed state. installed in an impossible position. Therefore, an opening/closing determination means is provided to determine whether the opening/closing frame is in the open state, and when it is determined that the opening/closing frame is in the closed state, the first The confirmation display section 181b may be in a non-display state (display OFF state), and the first confirmation display section 181a may be in a display state (display ON state). This eliminates waste and enables efficient display control.

Further, for the same reason, in the game ready state, the first confirmation display section 181a may be set to a display state (display ON state), and the first confirmation display section 181b may be set to a non-display state (display OFF state). As a result, the first confirmation display section 181a is controlled to display in a predetermined manner during the game, and although the retroactive effect is low for the player playing the game machine, other players around the game machine It becomes possible to give performance effects to those who are planning to play.

Next, the configuration of the second confirmation display section 182 of the sixth embodiment will be described using FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the second confirmation display section 182 shown in FIG. 66. The second confirmation display section 182 has a housing space inside a front frame 191 and a rear frame 192, which are outer casings. A board 194, a second display board 195, a diffusion lens 196, and an LED board 197 are stored in an overlapping manner in this order.

As described above, the second confirmation display section 182 can switch between displaying "Setting" and "Chance" depending on the state of the gaming machine. The first display board 194 on which the words "Setting" are formed is blue (first color), and the second display board 195 on which the words "Chance" are formed is red (second color). It is formed. Further, a plurality of LEDs 198 (LED elements) are mounted on the LED board 197, and the LEDs 198 can emit light in blue (first color) or red (second color). When the LED 198 is controlled to emit light in blue, the words "Setting in progress" on the first display board 194, which are formed in blue, are difficult to see from the front of the second confirmation display section 182, and the words "Setting in progress" are formed in red. The word "chance" on the second display board 195 is easily visible from the front of the second confirmation display section 182. Note that when the LED 198 does not emit light, both the words "Setting" and "Chance" are difficult to see. In this way, by controlling the display of the LED board 197 of the second confirmation display section 182, it is possible to display "Setting" or "Chance" depending on the status of the gaming machine. Become.

Next, another configuration of the second confirmation display section of the sixth embodiment will be described using FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of another second confirmation display section 183. The second confirmation display section 183 has an accommodation space inside the front frame 201 and the rear frame 202, which are outer casings. The lens 206 and the second LED board 207 are stored in an overlapping manner in this order. Further, the first LED board 203 is housed on the side of the storage space, on the side surface of the third display panel 205, the diffusion lens 206, and the second LED board 207, in a direction perpendicular to these. Further, the first LED board 203 is provided with an LED 204, and the second LED board 207 is provided with an LED 208. Furthermore, a notch is formed in the third display board 205 so as to display (pattern) the character being set. Furthermore, when the first LED board 203, third display board 205, diffusion lens 206, and second LED board 207 are stored and assembled in the housing space, the LEDs 204 of the first LED board 203 are placed on the side of the third display board 205. It is configured to be located in the

When the LED 204 of the first LED board 203 is not lit (hidden) and the LED 208 of the second LED board 207 is displayed, the characters "Setting" formed on the third display board 205 are not visible or visible. displayed in a difficult manner. That is, the display is simply performed using the colored light emitted by the LEDs 208 of the second LED board 207. On the other hand, when the LED 204 of the first LED board 203 emits light, or when both the LED 204 of the first LED board 203 and the LED 208 of the second LED board 207 emit light, the light emitted by the LED 204 of the first LED board 203 is used as the third display. The light enters the third display plate 205 from the side of the plate 205 and is reflected by the notch (notch portion), making the words “Setting in progress” easily visible. By controlling the display of the first LED board 203 in this manner, it is possible to control the display to switch between displaying and non-displaying the characters "Setting in progress" according to the state of the gaming machine.

[Other aspects]
In the embodiment described above, the mode setting switch 82 was configured as a sliding dip switch. The mode setting switch is not limited to this embodiment, and may be, for example, a rotary switch or a push-down or push-up binary switch. For example, when setting an arbitrary game mode, each time a binary switch is operated, information indicating the selected game mode (for example, [2]) is displayed on the information display section 88. It is assumed that the selected game mode changes from [2] to [3] to [4] for each operation.

In addition, in a gaming machine that allows the setting of the gaming mode to be changed using a gaming mode changing switch such as a binary switch or a rotary switch, the initial value of the gaming mode in the gaming mode changing state when the RAM is cleared must be specified. It may be set to a game mode (for example, game mode 3, which is the middle value of five levels). It is assumed that the RAM clearing process erases the stored information indicating the game mode. Then, in the game mode change state after clearing the RAM, by operating the game mode change switch in one direction, this specific game mode (game mode 3) is changed to game mode 2 and then game mode 1 in order, and the desired The game mode shall be selected. In addition, in the game mode change state after clearing the RAM, by operating the game mode change switch in the other direction, this specific game mode (game mode 3) is changed to game mode 4 and then game mode 5 in order, and the desired The game mode shall be selected. As a result, the operation mode for changing the settings after clearing the RAM is common to all gaming machines (for example, when setting the setting to 1, the operation is performed twice in one direction on all gaming machines). Furthermore, this also makes it possible to reduce operational errors when changing the settings when changing the settings of the game modes of a plurality of gaming machines. Further, this specific game mode (initial game mode) may be a game mode in which the jackpot probability is an intermediate value among the game modes provided in the game machine (corresponding to game mode 2 in this embodiment). As a result, just by clearing the RAM and moving to a setting change state, it is possible to set a gaming mode that is well-balanced between gaming parlors and players. Further, if it is desired to set a plurality of gaming machines to such a well-balanced gaming mode, the setting can be done without operating a gaming mode change switch. Furthermore, this makes it possible to minimize the number of operations (operation procedures) required to change the settings of the game mode, thereby simplifying the setting operations.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the information display section 88 is provided, and the game information to be displayed is changed depending on the period (period before the game becomes possible, period during the game possible state). Specifically, information specifying the gaming mode is displayed during the period before the game becomes possible, and the base value is displayed during the period when the game is possible. That is, one display section serves both as a game mode display section and a base value display section. Instead of this embodiment, a game mode display that displays the game mode and a base display that displays the base value may be provided separately. At this time, the information display section of Example 1 is used as a base display device (also referred to as a "gaming information display section"), and one or more 7-segment display devices are separately provided on the main control board, and the 7-segment display section shall be used as a gaming mode display (also referred to as a "gaming information display section"). Even if they are provided separately, the period during which information identifying the currently selected (setting) game mode is displayed on the game mode display is only when the game mode is changed before the game starts, or when the game mode is confirmed. shall be. Further, the base display may be always displayed after the power is turned on and before the game becomes possible, or it may be always displayed after the game becomes possible. At least, it is always displayed after the game becomes possible.

In the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 83 is provided on the power supply board 109, but instead of this arrangement, the RAM clear switch may be provided (or may be mounted) on the main control board 80. As a result, components related to changing the game mode (members for establishing specific conditions) can be managed on the main control board 80 as much as possible, making management easier and strengthening prevention of fraud.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, there are five types of game modes that can be set, and the jackpot probability, small win probability, and winning probability of the jackpot type are varied depending on the game mode. Instead of such an aspect, only the low probability jackpot probability may be varied depending on the game mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to easily recognize how much profit can be obtained by setting the gaming mode, and it becomes easy to manage the profits of the gaming machine.

In addition to the embodiments described above, the gaming machine is equipped with a timer means (for example, a watchdog timer or a timer capable of measuring the time since the power is turned on) capable of measuring time (or a timer capable of measuring time). , when the setting of the game mode is changed, the measured value of the timer means (for example, clock information such as "9:30") is stored in a predetermined storage area, and the stored measured value is checked later. It may be possible. Furthermore, the measured value indicating the setting change timing (time) stored in this storage area is to be backed up. Furthermore, since this information can be used for fraud prevention and fraud detection, it may be excluded from being erased by clearing the RAM, like the base value. In other words, even after initialization, the stored "measurement value indicating the setting change time (time)" will not be deleted. Further, information on this measured value may be outputted to the outside of the game machine from a predetermined external terminal (external output terminal), and may be managed by a hall computer or the like connected to the external terminal.

In addition, at a game parlor, a video camera (including a photographing section, a photographed data recording section, etc.) that captures images of gaming machines, and a display section (playback display section) that displays (plays back) the images recorded by the video camera are installed. A gaming machine monitoring system may also be constructed. Further, the video camera (surveillance camera) is arranged so as to be able to record an image of the entire gaming machine and its surroundings so that when the setting of the gaming mode is changed, the person who changed the setting is recorded. If you suspect fraud, malfunction, or error in the game mode settings, read out the memorized "measurement value indicating the setting change time (time)" and select the predetermined measurement value. Control may be performed so that a video camera image corresponding to the period (time) can be played back.

Other aspects of the embodiment described above include the following aspects. In order to prevent the mode setting switch 82 from being freely operated, it is preferable to cover (enclose) the mode setting switch 82 with a case (clothing member) with a lock to keep it in a locked state. Then, only when it is necessary to change the game mode (change settings), the game mode can be changed by unlocking the lock using the key and operating the mode setting switch 82 so as to satisfy the predetermined change conditions. good. This makes it possible to further reduce the possibility that the game mode will be changed illegally. In addition, when the RAM clear switch 83 is operated to initialize the gaming machine (backup area), by outputting audio at a predetermined volume (loud volume) from the speaker, or instead of/in addition to this, By controlling the lighting of the board lamp and frame lamp, the fact that the initialization has been performed will be conspicuously notified to those around you. This will notify the player that the game mode may have been changed. Further, in the first embodiment, a mode setting switch 82 is provided on the main control board 80, as shown in FIG. 6 and the like. However, the installation location of the mode setting switch is not limited to this aspect. For example, the mode setting switch 82 may be provided on the payout control board 110. Further, the mode setting switch 82 may be provided on a board separate from the main control board 80 and capable of communicating with the main control board 80 (capable of transmitting selection information to the CPU of the main control section).

In addition, in the mode setting monitoring process (S210) of the first embodiment, the setting state of the mode setting switch is constantly monitored while power is being supplied (that is, during gaming), and the gaming mode selected by the mode setting switch is If the game mode is different from the one set in the pachinko game machine, the state will be detected and the display will be displayed on a predetermined display section (the display screen 7a or the display section on the back side of the game machine), the speaker, or the outside of the game machine. It was decided to notify by output. Although the game mode cannot be changed by operating the mode setting switch during a game, when the power is turned on again or the game mode is reset, an unexpected game mode may be set. There is a possibility that unexpected situations may occur. Therefore, if the mode setting switch is operated even during a game, an error notification is issued, thereby making it possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In other aspects, in addition to or in place of this, it is possible to detect whether the mode setting lock part is in the ON position or the OFF position during the game, and when the mode setting lock part is in the ON position or the OFF position, when the game becomes possible (game start When the mode setting lock, which was in the OFF position during the above period, is operated to the ON position, this is notified on a predetermined display to prevent unforeseen situations. Specifically, if a game is started with the setting key inserted into the insertion part of the mode setting lock (in the OFF position), a game store clerk or maintenance person may come into contact with the back side of the game machine for some reason. Sometimes, the user accidentally (unintentionally) touches the setting key and turns it to the ON position. Even in such a case, since the game is in progress, the settings of the game mode cannot be changed, but problems may occur when the power is turned on again.

For example, the setting key is operated during a game, and the power is turned off while the mode setting lock is in the ON position. When the game clerk turns on the power next time, the mode setting lock is in the ON position, so the game machine enters the game mode confirmation state and does not shift to the game start state. In this state, by changing the mode setting lock part to the OFF position, the game can be shifted to the game start state. In addition, the game mode setting is not changed, but when the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on to clear the RAM, the mode setting lock is unintentionally set to the ON position, and the pachinko game machine is turned on. The game enters the game mode change state. In such a situation, the pachinko game machine cannot be smoothly shifted to a playable state, and the game store clerk or the like is troubled when turning on the power. Furthermore, there is a risk that the setting of the gaming mode may be changed by an unauthorized player at an unintended timing, resulting in an unexpected disadvantage.

In order to prevent such situations from occurring, the position of the mode setting lock (ON or OFF) is constantly monitored during the game, and if the mode setting lock is operated to the ON position during the game, a predetermined display will be displayed. The notification is made by outputting to the display screen 7a or the display section on the back side of the gaming machine, a speaker, or the outside of the gaming machine.

[others]
In addition, in the configuration of the above-mentioned gaming machine, "a starting port into which a game ball can enter, and a variable variable state that can be changed to a first mode and a second mode in which a possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first mode. A type starting port may be provided, and identification information display means may be provided for variably displaying identification information based on entry of a game ball into the starting port or the variable starting port. In addition, "a variable ball entry opening that can change between a ball entering state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a first correctness determination based on the ball entering the starting port. a first validity determination means for executing a second validity determination based on the ball entering the variable starting port; and a second validity determination means for performing a second validity determination based on the ball entering the variable starting port; and a special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball entry opening is set in a state where balls can be entered. In addition, "a first game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. and a game state setting means for setting the game state. Here, the "predetermined frequency" includes 0. In addition, "a starting port into which a game ball can enter, a variable ball entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter, a ball entry state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a ball entry disabled state in which a game ball cannot enter; determining means for making a determination based on the entry of the ball into the starting port; and game control means for executing game control based on game information stored in the game information storage means when power supply from the power supply means is started. It may also include the following.

In addition, in Example 1, the number of openings of the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening in one round is one, but the number of openings of the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening in one round is multiple times. It is also possible to have rounds with different numbers of openings. In addition, in the first embodiment, the control process is such that the second special figure reservation is prioritized over the first special figure reservation, the so-called special figure 2 priority control process, but the first special figure reservation is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform a control process that gives priority to the second special figure reservation, a so-called control process that gives priority to the first special figure. In addition, priority is not set for extinguishing the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation, and among the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation, they are consumed in order from the oldest memorized one. The control process may be a so-called control process for digesting pitches in order of arrival (order of memory).

Further, in the first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine having the specific area 39, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the results of the special symbol validity determination ( The present invention can also be applied to a type of gaming machine in which whether or not a high probability state will be granted after the end of a jackpot game is determined solely by the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Needless to say, this type of gaming machine is also subject to this implementation based on the fact that the special symbol is a jackpot (the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol). The pachinko game machine of Example 1 also includes other types of game machines. In addition, it is a type of pachinko game machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), and has a specific area inside, and a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a grand prize opening that can change between a state in which the ball cannot enter and a state in which the ball cannot be entered. The game ball is also applied to a pachinko game machine in which a game ball enters a jackpot in a ball-enabled state and passes through a specific area, resulting in a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed, and a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and when the result of the judgment based on the ball entering the starting hole is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed without passing through a specific area. Further, as a benefit, a high base state can be generated that increases the frequency of game balls entering the starting hole. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of balls entering the second starting port. The present invention can be applied to all types of gaming machines.

(Reference invention 1)
Furthermore, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
a memory storage means capable of storing and retaining gaming state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
gaming state information recovery means for restoring gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming state information stored and retained by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
gaming state information initializing means for erasing the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power and not restoring the gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , comprising:
The determination probability setting means includes:
When starting a game without restoring the gaming state information by the gaming state information initializing means, the determination probability of the determining means can be changed;
When the game state information is restored by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means may be made unchangeable.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1, further comprising a selection information determination process for determining selection information of the determination probability selection means when the power supply means starts supplying power. ,
The determination probability setting means includes:
When starting a game without restoring the gaming state information by the gaming state information initialization means, the judgment probability corresponding to the selection information judged based on the selection information judgment process is set as the judgment probability of the judgment means. It may also be set.

(Reference invention 2)
Furthermore, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition;
gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
selection information monitoring means for monitoring selection information of the determination probability selection means during a period when power is being supplied by the power supply means;
Even though the change condition is not satisfied, the selection information monitoring means determines that the information indicating the determination probability stored in the gaming state information storage means and the selection information of the determination probability selection means do not match. If it is determined that this is the case, a predetermined error process may be executed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1,
When the error processing is executed, the selection information monitoring means determines that the information indicating the determination probability stored in the gaming state information storage means and the selection information of the determination probability selection means match. The error processing may be terminated based on this.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2,
The change condition may be satisfied at least when the power supply means starts supplying power.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-3,
a memory storage means capable of storing and retaining gaming state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
gaming state information recovery means for restoring gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming state information stored and retained by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
gaming state information initializing means for erasing the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power and not restoring the gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , comprising:
The change condition may be satisfied at least when the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initializing means.

(Reference invention 3)
Furthermore, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3 is:
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
a memory storage means capable of storing and retaining gaming state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
gaming state information recovery means for restoring gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming state information stored and retained by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power; Equipped with
comprising a selection information determination process of determining selection information of the determination probability selection means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
When the game state information is restored by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, information indicating a determination probability specified based on the restored game state information and selection information of the determination probability selection means are provided. If it is determined that they do not match, a predetermined error process may be executed.

Thereby, when an attempt is made to change the determination probability while restoring the gaming state information using the gaming state information recovery means, a predetermined error process is performed. Further, this makes it possible to notify or prevent an attempt to change the determination probability while restoring the game state information.

Further, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1, when the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 restores the gaming state information by the gaming state information recovery means and starts playing, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 If it is determined that the information indicating the specified determination probability matches the selection information of the determination probability selection means, the game may be allowed to be played without executing the error process.

According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state information is restored and the game is started, the judgment probability specified based on the restored gaming state information and the judgment probability corresponding to the selection information of the judgment probability selection means are determined. If it is determined that these match, it is possible to play the game in a normal state without performing error processing. Thereby, when starting the game, the selection information of the determination probability selection means is confirmed before the game is started. This also makes it possible to provide fair games.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2,
The error process may include a game control stop process that stops at least part of the game control. This makes it possible to prevent a game from being executed without the judgment probability corresponding to the selection information of the judgment probability selection means and the judgment probability specified based on the restored game state information not matching. .

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-3,
The error processing includes a notification process for notifying that the information indicating the determination probability specified based on the restored gaming state information and the selection information of the determination probability selection means do not match.

(Reference invention 4)
In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a probability setting function as mentioned above, the gaming parlor decides which setting to use, so players play with the expectation of a gaming machine with a high setting (setting with a high jackpot probability). Select a machine. In addition, in order to attract many players, game parlors install many gaming machines with high settings that make it easy to give large profits to the players, or give large profits to the players in order to earn a large profit. A large number of game machines with low settings that are difficult to win (settings with low jackpot probability) are installed, and an appropriate number of game machines with high settings are installed to balance them. Therefore, setting and managing the jackpot probability is extremely important.

On the other hand, if the amount of profit given to the player is far from expected, the settings of the gaming machine may be checked. Also, if this is due to the settings of the gaming machine being unintended, it may be that the probability setter at the gaming parlor simply set the probability incorrectly (to a different probability than planned), or , it is necessary to confirm whether the fraudster set the probability fraudulently. However, since it is not known at what point the setting of the jackpot probability was changed, a great deal of effort is required to check security cameras and the like. Further, if such fraudulent activity is carried out, there is a risk that both the game parlor and the players will be disadvantaged, the number of players will decrease, and the operating rate of the gaming machines will decrease.

The present reference invention was made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and is capable of storing the timing of changing the setting of the judgment probability in a gaming machine equipped with a judgment probability setting function, thereby preventing fraud and providing a fair gaming machine. This is what we provide.

Reference invention 4-1 The gaming machine of the invention is
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
a timer means (timekeeping means) that counts at a constant cycle;
and timer storage means for storing the count value of the timer means,
The determination probability of the determination means can be changed by performing a predetermined input operation upon the start of power supply by the power supply means,
The timer storage means stores a count value when the judgment probability of the judgment means is changed.

According to such a gaming machine, a decision probability storage means stores a plurality of decision probabilities as the decision probabilities of the decision means, and a decision probability selection means is capable of selecting a predetermined decision probability from the plurality of decision probabilities by a predetermined input operation. and a determination probability setting means that can set the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. It also includes a timer means (timekeeping means) that counts at a constant cycle, and a timer storage means that stores a predetermined count value of the timer means, and the timer storage means is a timer means that is used when the setting of the determination probability is changed. The count value of . As a result, when the setting of the determination probability is changed, the count value at that time is stored, and it becomes possible to confirm later when the setting of the determination probability was changed. This also makes it possible to confirm whether the timing of changing the determination probability is appropriate, whether the person making the change is appropriate, etc.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1,
The game machine is characterized by comprising an external output terminal capable of outputting the count value stored in the timer storage means to the outside of the gaming machine.

According to such a gaming machine, a count value indicating the time when the determination probability stored in the timer storage means is changed can be outputted to the outside of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to easily manage the timing of changing the determination probability settings for each gaming machine using a hall computer or the like connected to the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or Reference Invention 4-2,
gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a memory storage means capable of storing and retaining gaming state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
gaming state information recovery means for restoring gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming state information stored and retained by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
gaming state information initializing means for erasing the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power and not restoring the gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , comprising;
The determination probability setting means includes:
When starting a game without restoring the gaming state information by the gaming state information initializing means, the determination probability of the determining means can be changed;
When the gaming state information is restored by the gaming state information restoring means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determining means cannot be changed.

According to such a gaming machine, the memory storage means is capable of storing and retaining the gaming state information including information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as "setting information") even after the power supply is stopped. It is assumed that they will be prepared. Then, when power supply is started, the determination probability selection means selects a condition on the condition that the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means is erased and the game is started without restoring the gaming state information. It is now possible to change the judgment probability (setting change using the judgment probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means, it is impossible to change the determination probability to the one selected by the determination probability selection means.

As a result, in order to change the current judgment probability setting to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the judgment probability setting is changed. It becomes possible to set the current gaming state to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

Furthermore, the gaming machine monitoring system of Reference Invention 4-4 is
The gaming machine described in any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-3;
a recording device having a photographing section for photographing the gaming machine; and a storage section for storing images photographed by the photographing section;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to such a gaming machine monitoring system, the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3 described above, a photographing section for photographing the gaming machine, and a storage section for storing images photographed by the photographing section are provided. A recording device having a. As a result, by viewing the video of the recording device at the time corresponding to the count value stored in the timer storage means, it is possible to easily confirm when the setting of the determination probability of the gaming machine was changed and who changed the setting. becomes.

(Reference invention 5)
In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a probability setting function as mentioned above, the gaming parlor decides which setting to use, so players play with the expectation of a gaming machine with a high setting (setting with a high jackpot probability). Select a machine. In addition, in order to attract many players, game arcades install many gaming machines with high settings that are easy to give players a lot of profits, and in order to earn a lot of profits, they give a lot of profits to players. A large number of game machines with low settings that are difficult to win (settings with low jackpot probability) are installed, and an appropriate number of game machines with high settings are installed to balance them. Therefore, setting and managing the jackpot probability is very important. Therefore, when setting the jackpot probability, in order to understand which jackpot probability has been set, it is preferable to provide a display unit that displays information indicating the set jackpot probability for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the percentage of gaming profits awarded based on the number of prize balls and out pitches is extremely important and useful gaming information in providing a fair gaming machine, so we have added a display section that displays information indicating the percentage of winnings. It is preferable to provide one. However, in this way, providing a large number of display sections, such as a display section displaying information indicating the jackpot probability and a display section displaying information indicating the granting ratio of gaming profits, is difficult due to the installation space of the gaming components. This is difficult, and cost may also be an issue.

This reference invention was made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a fair gaming machine by efficiently displaying a large amount of gaming information by controlling the display timing.

Reference Invention 5-1 The gaming machine of the invention is
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a gaming profit granting means that grants a predetermined amount of gaming profit based on the establishment of specific conditions;
a game information display section capable of displaying predetermined game information;
Equipped with
The game information display section is characterized in that during a first period, information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means is displayed, and during a second period, information indicating the granting ratio of gaming profits in a specific period is displayed. It is something to do.

According to such a gaming machine, a decision probability storage means stores a plurality of decision probabilities as the decision probabilities of the decision means, and a decision probability selection means is capable of selecting a predetermined decision probability from the plurality of decision probabilities by a predetermined input operation. and a determination probability setting means that can set the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. The invention also includes a gaming profit granting means that grants a gaming profit when a specific condition is met (for example, a ball enters a ball entrance or a specific symbol is stopped and displayed), and a gaming information display unit that displays predetermined gaming information. It is assumed that the gaming information display section displays information indicating the set determination probability during the first period, and displays information indicating the granting ratio of gaming profits in the specific period during the second period. As a result, the gaming information (setting probability information or gaming profit granting ratio information) displayed on the gaming information display section can be made different depending on the period (first period or second period), and the display section can be made common. This makes it possible to understand game information appropriately.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1,
The first period is a period before the start of the game, and the second period is a period after the start of the game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first period for displaying information indicating the set determination probability is the period before the start of the game, and the second period for displaying the information indicating the granting ratio of gaming profits is the period after the start of the game. period. In other words, the judgment probability set by a predetermined input operation before the start of the game is displayed before starting the game, and after starting the game by firing a game ball, etc., the setting information of the judgment probability is not displayed. , shall display the percentage of gaming profits awarded at the start of the game. This makes it possible to display appropriate information at an appropriate time, making it possible to use a common display unit, and making it possible to reliably grasp game information.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2,
A ball entrance into which a game ball can enter;
a first counting means capable of counting the number of game balls fired into the game area;
A second counting means capable of counting the number of game balls awarded by the gaming profit giving means,
The specific condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entry hole,
The information indicating the gaming profit grant rate displayed on the gaming information display section after the start of the game is information calculated based on the counts of the first counting means and the second counting means. It is something to do.

According to such a gaming machine, a ball entrance that satisfies a specific condition, a first counting means capable of counting the number of balls launched into the gaming area, and a second counting means capable of counting the number of game balls given. and. The information indicating the granting ratio of gaming profits is information calculated based on the counts of the first counting means and the second coefficient means. As a result, the gaming profit award percentage displayed in the second period after the start of the game will be calculated based on the number of balls fired and the number of game balls awarded, and if it is not after the start of the game, the required It is considered to be game information that does not exist (does not change). In addition, even if information indicating the awarding ratio of gaming profits is not displayed in the first period before the start of the game, and information indicating the determination probability is displayed, there will be no problem and the game information can be grasped reliably. This makes it possible.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-3,
The game information display section is characterized in that when the determination probability setting means changes and sets the determination probability of the determination means, the game information display section displays information indicating the determination probability in the first period. be.

According to such a gaming machine, when the determination probability of the determining means is changed and set, information indicating the determination probability is displayed in the first period. As a result, when a predetermined input operation is performed and the setting of the judgment probability is changed, the information indicating the judgment probability is reliably displayed in the first period, making it possible to appropriately and reliably grasp the game information. It becomes possible. Note that the game information display section may not display information indicating the determination probability in the first period if the determination probability setting is not changed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4,
gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
a memory storage means capable of storing and retaining gaming state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
gaming state information recovery means for restoring gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming state information stored and retained by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
gaming state information initializing means for erasing the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power and not restoring the gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; ,
Equipped with
The determination probability setting means includes:
When starting a game without restoring the gaming state information by the gaming state information initializing means, the determination probability of the determining means can be changed;
When the gaming state information is restored by the gaming state information restoring means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determining means cannot be changed.

According to such a gaming machine, the memory storage means is capable of storing and retaining the gaming state information including information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as "setting information") even after the power supply is stopped. It is assumed that they will be prepared. Then, when power supply is started, the determination probability selection means selects a condition on the condition that the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means is erased and the game is started without restoring the gaming state information. It is now possible to change the judgment probability (setting change using the judgment probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means, it is impossible to change the determination probability to the one selected by the determination probability selection means.

As a result, in order to change the current judgment probability setting to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the judgment probability setting is changed. It becomes possible to set the current gaming state to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

(Reference invention 6)
In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a probability setting function as mentioned above, the gaming parlor decides which setting to use, so players play with the expectation of a gaming machine with a high setting (setting with a high jackpot probability). Select a machine. In addition, game arcades may install many gaming machines with high settings to attract many players, or install many gaming machines with low settings in order to increase profits, or in order to maintain a balance between the two. Install an appropriate number of gaming machines with high settings. However, since this is all decided by the gaming parlor, there is a risk that not a single gaming machine with a high setting will be installed (all of them will have a low setting), and the players will be at a significant disadvantage compared to the gaming parlor. Additionally, this may cause players to distrust the gaming parlors, leading to a decrease in the number of players and a decrease in the operating rate of gaming machines.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a function to randomly set the determination probability in a gaming machine equipped with a determination probability setting function, thereby diversifying the manner in which the determination probability is set. This provides a gaming machine that is highly entertaining.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
comprising a gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information including at least information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
A gaming machine in which the determining means makes a determination based on a determination probability stored in the gaming state information storage means,
The present invention is characterized in that the determination probability selection means includes random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities.

According to such a gaming machine, the probability storage means stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probabilities of the determination means, the determination probability selection means is capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, The apparatus includes a determination probability setting means that can set the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means, and a gaming state information storage means that can store gaming state information including information indicating the set determination probability. Furthermore, as the determination probability selection means, a random selection means is provided which can randomly select a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities. Thereby, when selecting (setting) a determination probability by the random selection means, the determination probability is randomly selected from a plurality of determination probabilities and the determination probability is set. Further, this prevents the probability setter from intentionally setting a specific determination probability, and it becomes possible to set a well-balanced determination probability.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1,
The present invention is characterized in that the determination probability selection means includes specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities.

According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the random selection means, the determination probability selection means includes specific probability selection means that can select a predetermined specific determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities. With this, when selecting (setting) a judgment probability by the specific probability setting means, a specific judgment probability (for example, an intermediate judgment probability among a plurality of judgment probabilities) is selected from a plurality of judgment probabilities, The determination probability will be set. Furthermore, this makes it possible to prevent a gaming machine from being set to a setting value that is not intended by the probability setter.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2,
Depending on the input operation mode of the judgment probability selection means, it is possible to select whether the judgment probability is selected by the random selection means or the judgment probability is selected by the specific probability selection means.

According to such a gaming machine, the probability setting person can randomly set the judgment probability or select a specific judgment probability depending on the input operation mode (first input operation mode, second input operation mode, etc.) of the judgment probability selection means. It is possible to select whether to set the probability. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which determination probabilities are set at game parlors.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 or Reference Invention 6-3,
The present invention is characterized by comprising a notification section that reports which of the random selection means and the specific probability selection means has selected the determination probability.

According to such a gaming machine, a notification section is provided for notifying whether the determination probability has been determined by the random selection means or the specific probability selection means. Thereby, by checking the notification mode of the notification unit, it is possible to check which judgment probability selection means selected (set) the judgment probability.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4,
The notification unit is characterized in that it provides notification in a manner that is recognizable to the player.

According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize the notification mode of the notification unit. As a result, the player can recognize which judgment probability selection means has selected (set) the judgment probability, and it is possible for the player to recognize which judgment probability selection means is used to select (set) the judgment probability. It can be used as a reference. Furthermore, this makes it possible to prevent the player from playing a game with a game machine with unintended settings.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 or Reference Invention 6-5,
The notification unit is characterized in that it provides notification in a manner that can be recognized by a game store clerk.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming clerk (probability setting person) can recognize the notification mode of the notification section. Thereby, the gaming store clerk (probability setting person) can recognize which judgment probability selection means has selected (set) the judgment probability. In addition, this makes it possible to check whether a judgment probability is accidentally selected (set) by an unintended judgment probability selection means, and to prevent judgment probabilities from being selected (set) by an unintended judgment probability selection means as much as possible. It becomes possible to prevent this.

(Reference invention 7)
Reference invention 7-1 The gaming machine of the invention is
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
a memory storage means capable of storing and retaining gaming state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
gaming state information recovery means for restoring gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming state information stored and retained by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
gaming state information initializing means for erasing the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power and not restoring the gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , comprising:
A gaming machine in which the determining means makes a determination based on the determination probability stored in the gaming state information storage means,
The determination probability selection means includes random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities;
The determination probability setting means includes:
When starting a game without restoring the gaming state information by the gaming state information initializing means, the determination probability of the determining means can be changed;
When the gaming state information is restored by the gaming state information restoring means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determining means cannot be changed.

According to such a gaming machine, the probability storage means stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probabilities of the determination means, the determination probability selection means is capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, The apparatus includes a determination probability setting means that can set the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means, and a gaming state information storage means that can store gaming state information including information indicating the set determination probability. Furthermore, as the determination probability selection means, a random selection means is provided which can randomly select a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities. Thereby, when selecting (setting) a determination probability by the random selection means, the determination probability is randomly selected from a plurality of determination probabilities and the determination probability is set. Further, this prevents the probability setter from intentionally setting a specific determination probability, and it becomes possible to set a well-balanced determination probability.

In addition, it is equipped with a memory storage means that can store and retain gaming state information even after power supply is stopped, and when power supply is started, this memory storage means erases the stored gaming state information and stores the gaming state information. It is possible to change the judgment probability to the judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means (setting change by the judgment probability setting means) on the condition that the game is started without restoring the judgment probability. That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means, it is impossible to change the determination probability to the one selected by the determination probability selection means. As a result, in order to change the current judgment probability setting to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the judgment probability setting is changed. It becomes possible to set the current gaming state to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The present invention is characterized in that the determination probability selection means includes specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities.

According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the random selection means, the determination probability selection means includes specific probability selection means that can select a predetermined specific determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities. With this, when selecting (setting) a judgment probability by the specific probability setting means, a specific judgment probability (for example, an intermediate judgment probability among a plurality of judgment probabilities) is selected from a plurality of judgment probabilities, The determination probability will be set. Furthermore, this makes it possible to prevent a gaming machine from being set to a setting value that is not intended by the probability setter.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2,
Depending on the input operation mode of the judgment probability selection means, it is possible to select whether the judgment probability is selected by the random selection means or the judgment probability is selected by the specific probability selection means.

According to such a gaming machine, the probability setting person can randomly set the judgment probability or select a specific judgment probability depending on the input operation mode (first input operation mode, second input operation mode, etc.) of the judgment probability selection means. It is possible to select whether to set the probability. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which determination probabilities are set at game parlors.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 or Reference Invention 7-3,
The present invention is characterized by comprising a notification unit that reports which of the random selection means and the specific probability selection means has selected the determination probability.

According to such a gaming machine, a notification section is provided for notifying whether the determination probability has been determined by the random selection means or the specific probability selection means. Thereby, by checking the notification mode of the notification unit, it is possible to check which judgment probability selection means selected (set) the judgment probability.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4,
The notification unit is characterized in that it provides notification in a manner that is recognizable to the player.

According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize the notification mode of the notification section. As a result, the player can recognize which judgment probability selection means has selected (set) the judgment probability, and it is possible for the player to recognize which judgment probability selection means is used to select (set) the judgment probability. It can be used as a reference. Furthermore, this makes it possible to prevent the player from playing a game with a game machine with unintended settings.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 or Reference Invention 7-5,
The notification unit is characterized in that it provides notification in a manner that can be recognized by a game store clerk.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming clerk (probability setting person) can recognize the notification mode of the notification section. Thereby, the gaming store clerk (probability setting person) can recognize which judgment probability selection means has selected (set) the judgment probability. In addition, this makes it possible to check whether a judgment probability is accidentally selected (set) by an unintended judgment probability selection means, and to prevent judgment probabilities from being selected (set) by an unintended judgment probability selection means as much as possible. It becomes possible to prevent this.

(Reference invention 8)
Conventional gaming machines also have a so-called backup function, which retains the gaming state when power supply is cut off and restores the gaming state based on the stored memory when power is supplied again. There were some that had When a gaming machine with a backup function as mentioned above is equipped with a probability setting function, it becomes possible to change the settings while maintaining the gaming state, and depending on how these functions are used, it may be easier to hit the jackpot. , there is a risk that fraud may occur or that fair gaming machines cannot be provided.

In addition, in the case of gaming machines equipped with a probability setting function, the gaming parlor decides which settings to use, so players play the gaming machine with high expectations (settings with a high jackpot probability). select. In addition, game arcades may install many gaming machines with high settings to attract many players, or install many gaming machines with low settings in order to increase profits, or in order to maintain a balance between the two. Install an appropriate number of gaming machines with high settings. However, since this is all decided by the gaming parlor, there is a risk that not a single gaming machine with a high setting will be installed (all of them will have a low setting), and the players will be at a significant disadvantage compared to the gaming parlor. Additionally, this may cause players to distrust the gaming parlors, leading to a decrease in the number of players and a decrease in the operating rate of gaming machines.

The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and in a gaming machine equipped with a determination probability setting function, predetermined restrictions are set on the setting conditions of the determination probability setting function, and the determination probability is By having a function that notifies you when settings have been changed, a fair gaming machine is provided.

Reference Invention 8-1 The gaming machine of the invention is
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
a memory storage means capable of storing and retaining gaming state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
gaming state information recovery means for restoring gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming state information stored and retained by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
gaming state information initializing means for erasing the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power and not restoring the gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , comprising:
The determination probability setting means includes:
When starting a game without restoring the gaming state information by the gaming state information initializing means, the determination probability of the determining means can be changed;
When the game state information is restored by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means cannot be changed,
When starting a game without restoring the gaming status information by the gaming status information initializing means,
A notification mode of a predetermined notification unit (liquid crystal, back lamp) is made different depending on when the judgment probability of the judgment means is changed by performing a predetermined input operation and when the judgment probability of the judgment means is not changed. It is characterized by this.

According to such a gaming machine, by performing a predetermined input operation, it is possible to select and set the determination probability of the determination means to a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities. Furthermore, the game apparatus is provided with a memory holding means that can store and hold gaming state information including information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means (also referred to as "setting information") even after the power supply is stopped. Then, when power supply is started, the determination probability selection means selects a condition on the condition that the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means is erased and the game is started without restoring the gaming state information. It is now possible to change the judgment probability (setting change using the judgment probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means, it is impossible to change the determination probability to the one selected by the determination probability selection means. Furthermore, even when the gaming state information held by the memory holding means is erased and the game is started without restoring the gaming state information, there are times when the determination probability is changed and times when the determination probability is not changed. The notification mode of the notification unit is made different depending on whether the judgment probability is changed or not.

As a result, in order to change the current judgment probability setting to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the judgment probability setting is changed. It becomes possible to set the current gaming state to the initial state. In addition, it is possible to check whether the determination probability has been changed by checking the notification mode of the notification unit. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1,
The notification unit is characterized in that it notifies the player in a notification manner that the player can recognize whether the judgment probability of the judgment means has been changed or whether the judgment probability of the judgment means has not been changed.

According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed based on the notification mode of the notification unit. As a result, the player can recognize whether the selection (setting) of the determination probability has been changed, and can use this as a reference when selecting a gaming machine to play a game on. Furthermore, this makes it possible to prevent the player from playing a game with a game machine with unintended settings.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
The notification means is characterized in that it notifies whether the judgment probability of the judgment means has been changed or whether the judgment probability of the judgment means has not been changed in a notification manner that can be recognized by the game store clerk.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming store clerk (probability setter) can recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed based on the notification mode of the notification section. Thereby, the game store clerk (probability setter) can recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed with the initialization of the game state information. Moreover, this makes it possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of situations such as unintentionally changing the determination probability or unintentionally not changing the determination probability.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 or Reference Invention 8-3,
An identification information display means that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the determination result of the determination means, and stops displaying the identification information in a specific manner when the determination result is a specific result,
The notification unit is characterized in that it continues the notification mode at least for a period from a predetermined time after the power supply unit starts supplying power until displaying the identification information in a variable manner.

According to such a gaming machine, it is provided with an identification information display means that displays identification information in a variable manner, and the notification mode in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the determination probability by the notification unit has been changed is from a predetermined time after the start of power supply. It is assumed that the period continues until the variable display of the identification information is executed, that is, from when the power is turned on to the gaming machine until the start of the game. This makes it possible to check whether the setting of the determination probability has been changed before starting the game. Further, this allows the information to be used as a reference when selecting a gaming machine to play a game on.

(Reference invention 9)
Reference Invention 9-1 The gaming machine of the invention is
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
a memory storage means capable of storing and retaining gaming state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
gaming state information recovery means for restoring gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming state information stored and retained by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
gaming state information initializing means for erasing the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power and not restoring the gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , comprising:
The determination probability setting means includes:
When starting a game without restoring the gaming state information by the gaming state information initializing means, the determination probability of the determining means can be changed;
When the game state information is restored by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means cannot be changed,
a case where a game is started without restoring the gaming state information by the gaming state information initializing means, and when a predetermined input operation is performed to change the determination probability of the determining means;
a case where the game is started without restoring the gaming state information by the gaming state information initializing means, and the determination probability of the determining means is not changed;
when the game status information is restored by the game status information recovery means and the game is started;
This feature is characterized in that the notification mode of a predetermined notification section (liquid crystal, back lamp) is made different.

According to such a gaming machine, by performing a predetermined input operation, it is possible to select and set the determination probability of the determination means to a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities. Furthermore, the game apparatus is provided with a memory holding means that can store and hold gaming state information including information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means (also referred to as "setting information") even after the power supply is stopped. Then, when power supply is started, the determination probability selection means selects a condition on the condition that the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means is erased and the game is started without restoring the gaming state information. It is now possible to change the judgment probability (setting change using the judgment probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means, it is impossible to change the determination probability to the one selected by the determination probability selection means.

Furthermore, the notification mode of the notification section is made different depending on when the game is started after restoring the game state information and when the game is started without restoring the game state information. Furthermore, even when the gaming state information held by the memory holding means is erased and the game is started without restoring the gaming state information, there are times when the determination probability is changed and times when the determination probability is not changed. The notification mode of the notification unit is made different depending on whether the judgment probability is changed or not.

As a result, in order to change the current judgment probability setting to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the judgment probability setting is changed. It becomes possible to set the current gaming state to the initial state. In addition, it is possible to check whether the determination probability has been changed or not, and whether the gaming state information has been restored, depending on the notification mode of the notification unit. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1,
The notification unit may notify in a notification manner that the player can recognize whether the determination probability of the determination means has been changed, whether the determination probability of the determination means has not been changed, or whether the gaming state information has been restored. This is a characteristic feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize whether the determination probability has been changed and whether the gaming state information has been restored, depending on the notification mode of the notification section. As a result, players will be able to recognize whether the selection (setting) of the judgment probability has been changed and whether the gaming status information has been restored. It can be used as a reference. Furthermore, this makes it possible to prevent the player from playing a game with a game machine with unintended settings.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or Reference Invention 9-2,
The notification means is configured to notify whether the judgment probability of the judgment means has been changed, whether the judgment probability of the judgment means has not been changed, or whether the gaming state information has been restored, in a notification manner that can be recognized by a game store clerk. This is a characteristic feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming store clerk (probability setter) can recognize whether the determination probability has been changed or not and whether the gaming state information has been restored, depending on the notification mode of the notification section. As a result, the gaming store clerk (probability setter) can recognize whether the gaming state information has been restored or not, and whether the determination probability has been changed due to the initialization of the gaming state information. Moreover, this makes it possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of situations such as unintentionally changing the determination probability or unintentionally not changing the determination probability.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 or Reference Invention 9-3,
An identification information display means that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the determination result of the determination means, and stops displaying the identification information in a specific manner when the determination result is a specific result,
The notification unit is characterized in that it continues the notification mode at least for a period from a predetermined time after the power supply unit starts supplying power until displaying the identification information in a variable manner.

According to such a gaming machine, the notification mode includes an identification information display means that displays identification information in a variable manner, and allows recognition of whether or not the determination probability by the notification section has been changed and whether or not the gaming state information has been restored. It is assumed that the period continues from a predetermined time after the start of power supply until the variable display of identification information is executed, that is, from when the power is turned on to the gaming machine until the start of the game. This makes it possible to check whether the setting of the determination probability has been changed and whether the game state information has been restored before starting the game. Further, this allows the information to be used as a reference when selecting a gaming machine to play a game on.

(Reference invention 10)
Furthermore, if the amount of profit given to the player is far from expected, the settings of the gaming machine may be checked. Also, if this is due to the settings of the gaming machine being unintended, the probability setter at the gaming parlor may have simply set the probability incorrectly (to a different probability than planned), or , it is necessary to confirm whether the fraudster set the probability fraudulently. However, since it is not known at what point the setting of the jackpot probability was changed, a great deal of effort is required to check security cameras and the like. Further, if such fraudulent activity is carried out, there is a risk that both the game parlor and the players will be disadvantaged, the number of players will decrease, and the operating rate of the gaming machines will decrease. In addition, there are machines that include movable objects that move to indicate the possibility of executing a jackpot game or move in conjunction with the fluctuating display of symbols, and ensure that the movable objects are positioned at specific positions on the gaming machine. Therefore, some gaming machines perform an initial operation when the power is turned on. The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and is intended to provide a fair gaming machine by clarifying how to change the determination probability setting in a gaming machine equipped with a determination probability setting function.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 is
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
special game execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a particular manner and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
a first movable part that can operate in a predetermined operation mode;
a first movable control means for controlling the operation of the first movable part,
The first movable control means initially operates the first movable part when the power supply means starts supplying power,
When a predetermined judgment probability is set by the judgment probability setting means, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined judgment probability has been set is executed;
After the power supply means starts supplying power, the setting notification is executed, and then the initial operation of the first movable part is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, a decision probability storage means stores a plurality of decision probabilities as the decision probabilities of the decision means, and a decision probability selection means is capable of selecting a predetermined decision probability from the plurality of decision probabilities by a predetermined input operation. and a determination probability setting means that can set the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. A first movable part is provided that initially operates in a predetermined operation mode upon the start of power supply, and when a predetermined determination probability is set, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability has been set is executed. shall be taken as a thing. Then, after the start of power supply, a setting notification is executed, and then an initial operation of the first movable part is executed.

Thereby, it becomes possible to perform the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part, which are executed in conjunction with the start of power supply, in the order of the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part. This also prevents the visibility of the setting notification indicating that a setting change has been made from being obstructed by the initial movement of the first movable part, ensuring the visibility of the setting notification and confirming that a setting change has occurred. It becomes possible to reliably notify the

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1,
A performance display section capable of displaying a predetermined game performance in accordance with the variable display of the identification information;
The setting notification is displayed on the effect display section and executed,
The initial operation of the first movable section is characterized in that the first movable section passes through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display section.

According to such a gaming machine, a performance display section capable of displaying a predetermined game performance is provided, setting information is displayed on the performance display section, and the initial operation of the first movable section is performed at a position overlapping with the front surface of the performance display section. It is assumed that the operation mode is to pass. This prevents the setting notification displayed on the effect display section from being obstructed by the initial operation of the first movable part, ensures the visibility of the setting notification, and reliably notifies that a setting change has occurred. becomes possible. In addition, "initial operation of the first movable part" refers to checking whether there are any operational defects in the first movable part (no failures in the movable part) and positioning the first movable part to the initial position (origin position). (move to the initial position if it is at a location other than the initial position), and is an operation process executed when the power is turned on. Also called return-to-origin operation.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2,
a second movable part that can operate in a predetermined operation mode;
a second movable control means for controlling the operation of the second movable part,
The second movable control means initially operates the second movable part when the power supply means starts supplying power,
The initial operation of the second movable part is such that the second movable part does not pass through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display part,
After the power supply means starts supplying power, the second movable section performs an initial operation, and then the first movable section performs an initial operation.

According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the first movable part, the second movable part is provided which initially operates in a predetermined operation mode upon the start of power supply, and the initial operation of the second movable part is in a predetermined operation mode. Unlike the 1 movable part, the movement mode is such that it does not pass through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display part. After the start of power supply, the second movable section performs an initial operation, and then the first movable section performs an initial operation. As a result, the initial operation of the second movable part that does not obstruct the visibility of the effect display section that displays setting information is performed before the initial operation of the first movable section that may obstruct the visibility of the effect display section that displays setting information. It is possible to execute Moreover, this makes it possible to quickly advance the initial operation of the movable part and quickly bring the game machine into a playable state after power is turned on.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3,
The configuration is characterized in that the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part are executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable part is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable section can be executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable section is executed. As a result, the initial operation of the second movable part that does not obstruct the visibility of the effect display section that displays the setting notification is performed in parallel with the setting notification, and the setting notification is displayed after the setting notification is performed for a predetermined period of time. It becomes possible to perform an initial operation of the first movable part that may obstruct the visibility of the effect display section. As a result, the initial operation of the first movable part and the second movable part can be quickly completed without impeding the visibility of the setting notification, and the gaming machine can be quickly brought into a playable state after the power is turned on. Become.

Note that even after the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part are started in parallel, and the setting notification is performed for a predetermined period (a period sufficient to notify the setting change), the initial operation of the second movable part ends. If not, the initial movement of the first movable part may be performed in parallel with the continuing initial movement of the second movable part, or it may be performed after waiting for the initial movement of the second movable part to be completed. You can. In addition, if the setting notification is to be continued after a predetermined period of time (a period sufficient to notify the setting change), the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part are executed in parallel after the predetermined period has elapsed. You can. That is, as the setting notification execution period, a predetermined period (a period sufficient for setting change notification) may be set as a period in which the initial operation of the first movable part is not performed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-4,
gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a memory storage means capable of storing and retaining gaming state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
gaming state information recovery means for restoring gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming state information stored and retained by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
gaming state information initializing means for erasing the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power and not restoring the gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , comprising:
The determination probability setting means includes:
When starting a game without restoring the gaming state information by the gaming state information initializing means, the determination probability of the determining means can be changed;
When the gaming state information is restored by the gaming state information restoring means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determining means cannot be changed.

According to such a gaming machine, the memory storage means is capable of storing and retaining the gaming state information including information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as "setting information") even after the power supply is stopped. It is assumed that they will be prepared. Then, when power supply is started, the determination probability selection means selects a condition on the condition that the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means is erased and the game is started without restoring the gaming state information. It is now possible to change the judgment probability (setting change using the judgment probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means, it is impossible to change the determination probability to the one selected by the determination probability selection means.

As a result, in order to change the current judgment probability setting to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the judgment probability setting is changed. It becomes possible to set the current gaming state to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

(Reference invention 11)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 is
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
special game execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a particular manner and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
a first movable part that can operate in a predetermined operation mode;
a first movable control means for controlling the operation of the first movable part,
The first movable control means initially operates the first movable part when the power supply means starts supplying power,
When a predetermined judgment probability is set by the judgment probability setting means, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined judgment probability has been set is executed,
comprising a setting notification confirmation means for determining whether the setting notification has been executed for a predetermined period of time;
The first movable control means executes an initial operation of the first movable part after the power supply means starts supplying power and after the setting notification confirmation means determines that the setting notification has been executed for a predetermined period of time. It is characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, a decision probability storage means stores a plurality of decision probabilities as the decision probabilities of the decision means, and a decision probability selection means is capable of selecting a predetermined decision probability from the plurality of decision probabilities by a predetermined input operation. and a determination probability setting means that can set the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. A first movable part is provided that initially operates in a predetermined operation mode upon the start of power supply, and when a predetermined determination probability is set, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability has been set is executed. shall be taken as a thing. Further, the apparatus includes a setting notification confirmation means for confirming that the setting notification has been executed for a predetermined period of time, and performs the initial operation of the first movable part after determining that the setting notification has been executed for a predetermined period of time after the start of power supply.

The first signal transmitting means transmits a first signal indicating that the setting notification has been executed after the setting notification has been executed for a predetermined period of time, and after receiving the first signal after starting the power supply, the first movable The initial operation of the section may also be executed.

Thereby, it becomes possible to perform the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part, which are executed in conjunction with the start of power supply, in the order of the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part. Moreover, after securing the set notification time of a predetermined time, it becomes possible to perform the initial operation of the first movable part. In addition, this prevents the visibility of the setting notification indicating that a setting change has been made from being obstructed by the initial operation of the first movable part, and ensures the visibility of the setting notification for a predetermined period. It is possible to reliably notify that settings have been changed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1,
comprising an effect display section capable of displaying a predetermined game effect in accordance with the variable display of the identification information;
The setting notification is displayed on the effect display section and executed,
The initial operation of the first movable section is characterized in that the first movable section passes through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display section.

According to such a gaming machine, a performance display section capable of displaying a predetermined game performance is provided, setting information is displayed on the performance display section, and the initial operation of the first movable section is performed at a position overlapping with the front surface of the performance display section. It is assumed that the operation mode is to pass. This prevents the setting notification displayed on the effect display section from being obstructed by the initial operation of the first movable part, ensures the visibility of the setting notification, and reliably notifies that a setting change has occurred. becomes possible. In addition, "initial operation of the first movable part" refers to checking whether there are any operational defects in the first movable part (no failures in the movable part) and positioning the first movable part to the initial position (origin position). (move to the initial position if it is at a location other than the initial position), and is an operation process executed when the power is turned on. Also called return-to-origin operation.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2,
a second movable part that can operate in a predetermined operation mode;
a second movable control means for controlling the operation of the second movable part,
The second movable control means initially operates the second movable part when the power supply means starts supplying power,
The initial operation of the second movable part is such that the second movable part does not pass through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display part,
After the power supply means starts supplying power, the second movable section performs an initial operation, and then the first movable section performs an initial operation.

According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the first movable part, the second movable part is provided which initially operates in a predetermined operation mode upon the start of power supply, and the initial operation of the second movable part is in a predetermined operation mode. Unlike the 1 movable part, the movement mode is such that it does not pass through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display part. After the start of power supply, the second movable section performs an initial operation, and then the first movable section performs an initial operation. As a result, the initial operation of the second movable part that does not obstruct the visibility of the effect display section that displays setting information is performed before the initial operation of the first movable section that may obstruct the visibility of the effect display section that displays setting information. It is possible to execute Moreover, this makes it possible to quickly advance the initial operation of the movable part and quickly bring the game machine into a playable state after power is turned on.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3,
The present invention is characterized in that the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable section are executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable section is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable section can be executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable section is executed. As a result, the initial operation of the second movable part that does not obstruct the visibility of the effect display section that displays the setting notification is performed in parallel with the setting notification, and the setting notification is displayed after the setting notification is performed for a predetermined period of time. It becomes possible to perform an initial operation of the first movable part that may obstruct the visibility of the effect display section. As a result, the initial operation of the first movable part and the second movable part can be quickly completed without impeding the visibility of the setting notification, and the gaming machine can be quickly brought into a playable state after the power is turned on. Become.

Note that even after the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part are started in parallel, and the setting notification is performed for a predetermined period (a period sufficient to notify the setting change), the initial operation of the second movable part ends. If not, the initial movement of the first movable part may be performed in parallel with the continuing initial movement of the second movable part, or it may be performed after waiting for the initial movement of the second movable part to be completed. You can. In addition, if the setting notification is to be continued after a predetermined period of time (a period sufficient to notify the setting change), the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part are executed in parallel after the predetermined period has elapsed. You can. That is, as the setting notification execution period, a predetermined period (a period sufficient for setting change notification) may be set as a period in which the initial operation of the first movable part is not performed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4,
comprising an initial operation confirmation means for determining whether the initial operation of the second movable part is completed;
The first movable control means controls the first movable portion after the setting notification confirmation unit determines that the setting notification has been executed for a predetermined period of time, and after the initial operation confirmation unit determines that the initial operation has been completed. It is characterized by executing the initial operation.

According to such a gaming machine, an initial operation confirmation means is provided for determining whether or not the initial operation of the second movable part has been completed. Then, after the setting notification is executed for a predetermined period of time and after the initial operation is completed, the initial operation of the first movable part is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable section, which are executed with the start of power supply, before the initial operation of the first movable section. In addition, since a predetermined setting notification time is secured and the initial operation of the first movable part is started after the operation of the second movable part is completed, the visibility of the setting notification indicating that a setting change has been made is improved. , it is possible to prevent the initial operation of the first movable part from being inhibited, and to reliably notify that there has been a setting change.

Further, after the initial operation of the second movable portion is completed, a second signal transmitting means is provided for transmitting a second signal indicating that the initial operation has been completed. After receiving both the first signal transmitted after the setting notification has been executed for a predetermined time and the second signal transmitted after completing the initial operation of the second movable part, the initial operation of the first movable part is performed. It may also be used to execute.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-5,
gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a memory storage means capable of storing and retaining gaming state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
gaming state information recovery means for restoring gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming state information stored and retained by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
gaming state information initializing means for erasing the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power and not restoring the gaming state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , comprising:
The determination probability setting means includes:
When starting a game without restoring the gaming state information by the gaming state information initializing means, the determination probability of the determining means can be changed;
The present invention is characterized in that when the game state information is restored by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means cannot be changed.

According to such a gaming machine, the memory storage means is capable of storing and retaining the gaming state information including information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as "setting information") even after the power supply is stopped. It is assumed that they will be prepared. Then, when power supply is started, the determination probability selection means selects a condition on the condition that the gaming state information stored in the memory holding means is erased and the game is started without restoring the gaming state information. It is now possible to change the judgment probability (setting change using the judgment probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means, it is impossible to change the determination probability to the one selected by the determination probability selection means.

As a result, in order to change the current judgment probability setting to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the judgment probability setting is changed. It becomes possible to set the current gaming state to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

(Reference invention 12)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 is
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
special game execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a particular manner and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
gaming information storage means for storing gaming information including a determination result by the determining means;
Setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means;
a first memory storage means capable of storing and retaining game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
a second memory storage means capable of storing and retaining the setting information stored in the setting probability storage means for a predetermined period even after the power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage;
gaming information recovery means capable of restoring gaming information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming information stored and held by the first memory holding means when the power supplying means starts supplying power;
A game in which when the power supply means starts supplying power by a predetermined input operation, the game information stored and held by the first memory storage means is erased, and the game information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected is not restored. Information initialization means;
When the game information initialization means erases the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means, the determination probability setting means can change the determination probability of the determination means,
When the game information recovery means restores the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means, the determination probability setting means cannot change the determination probability of the determination means,
When the game information held by the first memory holding means is deleted and the determination probability of the judgment means is not changed, the setting information held by the second memory holding means is predetermined normal information. Sometimes,
The first memory holding means erases the game information stored and held, and at the same time, the game is started based on the judgment probability of the judgment means based on the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means. be.

According to such a gaming machine, the determination means has a plurality of determination probabilities, and a predetermined determination probability is selected from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, and the selected determination probability is determined by the determination means. can be set as the judgment probability. Further, the set probability storage means stores setting information indicating the selected (set) determination probability, the game information storage means stores game information including the determination result by the determination means, and stores game information even after power supply is stopped. a first memory holding means for storing the setting information; a second memory holding means for storing the setting information even after the power supply is stopped; a gaming information recovery means for restoring the game information held in the memory; and game information initialization means for erasing game information.

Then, erasing the game information stored and retained by the game information initialization means is a condition for changing the determination probability setting, and if the stored game information is not deleted, the determination probability setting cannot be changed. There is. In addition, if the stored game information is deleted and the determination probability setting is not changed, if the setting information stored and stored by the second storage storage means is normal (that is, if there is no abnormality), the game information will be deleted. The game is started by initializing and setting the determination probability based on the stored setting information.

As a result, in order to change the current judgment probability setting to another judgment probability, it is necessary to initialize the game information, and the game state at the start of the game when changing the judgment probability setting is changed to the initial It is possible to set the status. This makes it possible to provide fair games. In addition, when the game information is initialized and the judgment probability setting is not changed, if there is no abnormality in the stored setting information, the judgment probability will be set based on the stored setting information. This allows you to start playing the game. This eliminates the need for a second determination probability setting operation when initializing game information, making it possible to efficiently set the gaming machine.

Note that the normal information is information indicating a plurality of determination probabilities stored in the determination probability storage means, and information indicating determination probabilities that can be set by the determination probability setting means. For example, if it is possible to set any judgment probability from three types (plurality) of judgment probabilities, the three types of settings are respectively set as setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3, and these setting 1, setting 2, or setting 3 are set. Information indicating this is called normal information. Furthermore, information that does not indicate setting 1, setting 2, or setting 3 is referred to as abnormal information (abnormal information). Further, the first abnormality determination means determines whether there is any abnormality in the information stored in the set probability storage means when starting the power supply, and the game information stored in the game information storage means when starting the power supply. A second abnormality determination means for determining whether or not there is an abnormality may be provided. Further, the apparatus includes a setting information recovery means for restoring the setting information when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected, based on the setting information stored and held by the second memory storage means when the power supply means starts supplying power. shall be.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1,
When the game information held by the first memory holding means is deleted and the determination probability of the judgment means is not changed, the setting information held by the second storage holding means is not predetermined normal information. This feature is characterized in that it is impossible to start the game.

According to such a gaming machine, the game information held in memory is deleted, but if the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), it is determined that there is no abnormality in the setting information held in memory by the second memory holding means. Under the condition, the determination probability is set based on the setting information and the game is started. On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means, it is impossible to start the game in a state where there is an abnormality. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the setting information, the game is reliably rendered unplayable before the start of the game without setting any judgment probabilities, thereby preventing unexpected disadvantages to the game parlor and players. It becomes possible to prevent this.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 or Reference Invention 12-2,
When the game information held by the first memory holding means is deleted and the determination probability of the judgment means is not changed, the setting information held by the second storage holding means is not predetermined normal information. In this case, the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means is erased, and the judgment probability of the judgment means is set by the judgment probability setting means, and then the game can be started. It is.

According to such a gaming machine, the game information held in memory is deleted, but if the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), it is determined that there is no abnormality in the setting information held in memory by the second memory holding means. Under the condition, the determination probability is set based on the setting information and the game is started. On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means, it is impossible to start the game in the abnormal state, the game information is erased, and a determination is made by further performing a predetermined input operation. The game can be started by setting the determination probability by the probability setting means. That is, if there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means, the game information is deleted and the determination probability is reset, thereby making it possible to start the game. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the setting information, it is necessary to set an arbitrary determination probability with a predetermined input operation before starting the game. This also prevents unexpected or abnormal judgment probabilities from being set, and prevents unexpected disadvantages for game parlors and players. Become.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 or Reference Invention 12-3,
When the game information held by the first memory holding means is deleted and the determination probability of the judgment means is not changed, the setting information held by the second storage holding means is not predetermined normal information. when,
The present invention is characterized in that a predetermined display section displays a notification indicating that the determination probability setting means needs to set the determination probability of the determination means.

According to such a gaming machine, the game information stored in the memory is deleted, but when the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), if there is an abnormality in the setting information stored in the second storage storage means. In this case, a predetermined display unit provides a notification indicating that a predetermined input operation is required to set a predetermined determination probability by the determination probability setting means. As a result, even if the setting information is abnormal and the game becomes disabled (the game does not start), it is possible to easily and clearly understand the means to release the disabled state (to make it possible to play). becomes possible.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to provide a fair and efficient gaming machine by setting a predetermined limit on the setting conditions of the determination probability setting function.

(Reference invention 13)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 is
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
special game execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a particular manner and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
gaming information storage means for storing gaming information including a determination result by the determining means;
Setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means;
a first memory storage means capable of storing and retaining game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
a second memory storage means capable of storing and retaining the setting information stored in the setting probability storage means for a predetermined period even after the power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage;
gaming information recovery means capable of restoring gaming information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming information stored and held by the first memory holding means when the power supplying means starts supplying power;
A game in which when the power supply means starts supplying power by a predetermined input operation, the game information stored and held by the first memory storage means is erased, and the game information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected is not restored. Information initialization means;
When the game information initialization means erases the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means, the determination probability setting means can change the determination probability of the determination means,
When the game information recovery means restores the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means, the determination probability setting means cannot change the determination probability of the determination means,
When the game information held by the first memory holding means is deleted and the determination probability of the judgment means is not changed, the setting information held by the second memory holding means is predetermined normal information. In some cases, the game information stored and held by the first storage storage means is erased, and a game is started based on the determination probability of the determination means based on the setting information stored and held by the second storage storage means,
If there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored and held by the first storage holding means, and when the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means is predetermined normal information, the first storage holding means The present invention is characterized in that the game information stored and held by the means is erased, and the game can be started based on the determination probability of the judgment means based on the setting information stored and held by the second storage storage means.

According to such a gaming machine, the determination means has a plurality of determination probabilities, and a predetermined determination probability is selected from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, and the selected determination probability is determined by the determination means. can be set as the judgment probability. Further, the set probability storage means stores setting information indicating the selected (set) determination probability, the game information storage means stores game information including the determination result by the determination means, and stores game information even after power supply is stopped. a first memory holding means for storing the setting information; a second memory holding means for storing the setting information even after the power supply is stopped; a gaming information recovery means for restoring the game information held in the memory; and game information initialization means for erasing game information.

Then, erasing the game information stored and retained by the game information initialization means is a condition for changing the determination probability setting, and if the stored game information is not deleted, the determination probability setting cannot be changed. There is. In addition, if the stored game information is deleted and the determination probability setting is not changed, if the setting information stored and stored by the second storage storage means is normal (that is, if there is no abnormality), the game information will be deleted. The game is started by initializing and setting the determination probability based on the stored setting information. Furthermore, even if the gaming information that has been stored and retained is not deleted by the gaming information initialization means, if there is an abnormality in the gaming information that has been stored and the retained setting information is normal information, the gaming information will be deleted in the same way. The determination probability is set based on the initialized and stored setting information, and the game can be started.

As a result, in order to change the current judgment probability setting to another judgment probability, it is necessary to initialize the game information, and the game state at the start of the game when changing the judgment probability setting is changed to the initial It is possible to set the status. This makes it possible to provide fair games. In addition, when the game information is initialized and the judgment probability setting is not changed, if there is no abnormality in the stored setting information, the judgment probability will be set based on the stored setting information. This allows you to start playing the game. Additionally, if there is an abnormality in the stored game information due to some abnormality, the game information will be initialized even if the game information initialization means does not erase the game information. Furthermore, if the setting information at this time is normal information, it is possible to start the game without changing the settings regarding the determination probability. Moreover, this eliminates the need for a second determination probability setting operation when initializing the game information, making it possible to efficiently set the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1,
If there is an abnormality in the game information stored and held by the first storage storage means, and when the setting information stored and held by the second storage storage unit is not the normal information, it is impossible to start the game. This is a characteristic feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the game information held in memory is deleted, but if the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), it is determined that there is no abnormality in the setting information held in memory by the second memory holding means. Under the condition, the determination probability is set based on the setting information and the game is started. On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the game information stored and retained in the first memory retention means and also in the setting information stored and retained in the second memory retention means, the game may not be started in the abnormal state. It is considered impossible. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the setting information, the game is reliably rendered unplayable before the start of the game without setting any judgment probabilities, thereby preventing unexpected disadvantages to the game parlor and players. It becomes possible to prevent this.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 or Reference Invention 13-2,
If there is an abnormality in the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means and the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means is not the normal information, the first storage holding means The game information is erased, and the game can be started after the determination probability setting means sets the determination probability of the determination means.

According to such a gaming machine, the game information held in memory is deleted, but if the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), it is determined that there is no abnormality in the setting information held in memory by the second memory holding means. Under the condition, the determination probability is set based on the setting information and the game is started. On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the game information stored and retained in the first memory retention means and also in the setting information stored and retained in the second memory retention means, the game may not be started in the abnormal state. The game can be started by setting the determination probability by the determination probability setting means with a predetermined input operation after deleting the game information. That is, if there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means, the game information is deleted and the determination probability is reset, thereby making it possible to start the game. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the setting information, it is necessary to set an arbitrary determination probability with a predetermined input operation before starting the game. This also prevents unexpected or abnormal judgment probabilities from being set, and prevents unexpected disadvantages for game parlors and players. Become.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 or Reference Invention 13-3,
When the game information held by the first memory holding means is deleted and the determination probability of the judgment means is not changed, the setting information held by the second storage holding means is not predetermined normal information. when,
The present invention is characterized in that a predetermined display section displays a notification indicating that the determination probability setting means needs to set the determination probability of the determination means.

According to such a gaming machine, the game information stored in the memory is deleted, but when the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), if there is an abnormality in the setting information stored in the second storage storage means. In this case, a predetermined display unit provides a notification indicating that a predetermined input operation is required to set a predetermined determination probability by the determination probability setting means. As a result, even if the setting information is abnormal and the game becomes disabled (the game does not start), it is possible to easily and clearly understand the means to release the disabled state (to make it possible to play). becomes possible.

(Reference invention 14)
Furthermore, if the gaming machine allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed (setting change), there is a risk that the setting of the jackpot probability may be changed while the player is playing the game or while the player is away from the player's seat. Furthermore, if the player plays a game without knowing that the settings have been changed, there is a possibility that the player will suffer an unexpected disadvantage. Additionally, depending on how the setting change function is used, it may make it easier to hit the jackpot or harder to hit the jackpot, which could lead to fraud or make it impossible to provide a fair gaming machine. .

In view of these problems, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 is
a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
an identification information display unit that variably displays identification information;
special game execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a particular manner and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines as a specific result;
Judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
A power supply means for supplying power;
When the power supply means starts supplying power, the gaming machine is capable of changing the setting of the determination probability of the determination means by the predetermined input operation,
a setting display unit that notifies that the setting change is being executed or that the setting change has been made while the setting change is being executed;
The present invention is characterized in that the setting display section is provided at a position that is visible to the player.

According to such a gaming machine, the determination means has a plurality of determination probabilities, and when power supply is started, a predetermined determination probability is selected from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation. The selected determination probability can be set as the determination probability of the determining means. In addition, while the settings are being changed, the player is provided with a settings display section that can notify that the settings are being changed or that the settings have been changed, and the settings display section is visible to the player. located at the location. Thereby, even if the settings are changed after the game has started, it is possible to know that the settings have been changed by checking the display mode of the settings display section. This also makes it possible to provide a fair gaming machine by preventing players from suffering unexpected disadvantages due to game store clerks and the like changing settings without informing the players.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1,
A fixed frame fixed to the island equipment,
an opening and closing frame that is rotatable about one end and that can be opened and closed with respect to the fixed frame;
The determination probability selection means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine,
The setting change is performed by rotating the opening/closing frame to open it and performing the predetermined input operation,
The setting display section is provided at a position that is visible to the player when the opening/closing frame is rotated to the open state and the settings are changed.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming machine includes a fixed frame and an opening/closing frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the fixed frame, and the determination probability selection means for changing settings is provided on the back side of the gaming machine. It is set in. In addition, settings can be changed by rotating the opening/closing frame relative to the fixed frame fixed to the island equipment to open it, and performing the specified input operation while the judgment probability selection means on the back side of the gaming machine is accessible. It is assumed that The setting display section is provided at a position that is visible to the player when the opening/closing frame is rotated to open the opening/closing frame.

As a result, even if the opening/closing frame is rotated due to setting change work and the orientation of the gaming machine (the opening/closing frame or the part that rotates with the opening/closing frame) changes, the setting display section can be moved to a position where it can be seen in the open state. , the player can confirm and understand that a setting change is being made (or that a setting change has been made).

Additionally, this makes it difficult for probability setters such as game store clerks to change the settings without the player's knowledge after the game has started (while the player is seated). It becomes possible to create a fair and impartial gaming machine.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 or Reference Invention 14-2,
The setting display section is located at a position that is invisible or difficult to see when the opening/closing frame is in a closed state, and is provided at a position where it is easily visible when the opening/closing frame is in an open state. .

According to such a gaming machine, the setting display section is in a position that is invisible or difficult to see when the opening/closing frame is in the closed state, and when the opening/closing frame is rotated from the closed state to the open state. It shall be installed in a position that is easily visible. This makes it possible to use the setting display section as a confirmation display section when changing settings with the opening/closing frame open. In addition, this allows the player to pay attention to the setting display section, which is easily visible when the opening/closing frame is in the open state, and to ensure that the settings are changed when changes are made. or that settings have been changed).

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 to Reference Invention 14-3,
The identification information display section is provided on the surface side of the gaming machine,
The display mode of the identification information display section is such that it is easy to see when the opening/closing frame is in a closed state, and difficult to see when the opening/closing frame is in an open state;
The setting display section is provided on a side surface of the gaming machine,
The display mode of the setting display section is characterized in that it is invisible or difficult to see when the opening/closing frame is in a closed state, and is easily visible when the opening/closing frame is in an open state. be.

According to such a gaming machine, the identification information display section is provided on the surface side of the gaming machine, and the display mode of the identification information display section is easy to see when the opening/closing frame is in the closed state; It is difficult to see when it is open. Further, the setting display section is provided on the side of the gaming machine, and the display mode of the setting display section is that it is invisible or difficult to see when the opening/closing frame is closed, and when the opening/closing frame is closed, Easy to see. As a result, when the opening/closing frame is in the closed state, the player pays attention to and visually recognizes the identification information display section, and when the opening/closing frame is in the open state, the player pays attention to and visually confirms the setting display section. Further, in this way, when a setting change is made with the opening/closing frame in an open state, it becomes possible to confirm and understand that the setting change is certainly made (or that the setting change has been made).

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 to Reference Invention 14-4,
The setting display section performs a notification display to notify that the setting change is being executed or that the setting change has been made while the setting change is being executed, and displays an effect related to the game during the game. It is characterized by this.

According to such a gaming machine, while the setting change is being executed, the setting display section displays a notification to notify that the setting change is being executed or that the setting change has been made, and the setting display section displays a notification display to notify that the setting change is being executed or that the setting change has been made. During games that are not being played, effects related to the games will be displayed. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the setting display section even during a game where no settings are being changed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 to Reference Invention 14-5,
a second setting display section that can display the setting information set by the determination probability setting means to confirm the setting;
The second setting display section is provided on the back side of the gaming machine,
The display operation for displaying the setting information on the second setting display section is performed by rotating the opening/closing frame to open it,
The present invention is characterized in that while the setting information is being displayed on the second setting display section, a display is displayed on the setting display section notifying that the setting is being confirmed.

According to such a gaming machine, a second setting display section that allows setting information to be confirmed by displaying the setting information of the gaming machine is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, and the setting information is displayed on the second setting display section. The display operation for displaying is performed by rotating the opening/closing frame from the closed state to the open state. Then, while the setting information is being displayed on the second setting display section, that is, while the settings are being confirmed, a notification display is also performed on the setting display section to notify that the setting is being confirmed. As a result, when a game store clerk or the like rotates the opening/closing frame and performs some operations on the back side of the gaming machine, the player can check the settings by looking at the setting display section and checking whether the settings are being changed or not. This makes it possible to more reliably confirm and understand whether this is the case. Furthermore, this makes it possible to eliminate distrust among players and provide a fair and impartial gaming machine.

In addition, as another aspect of Reference Invention 14,
a setting display section (first setting display section) that notifies that the setting change is being executed or that the setting change has been made during the execution of the setting change (setting change operation);
A third setting display unit that notifies that the setting change is being executed or that the setting change has been made during the execution of the setting change (setting change operation),
The setting display section (first setting display section) is provided on the side of the gaming machine, and is provided at a position where the player can see (easily see) when the opening/closing frame is in the closed state,
The third setting display section is provided on the front side of the gaming machine, and is provided at a position where the player can see (and easily see) when the opening/closing frame is in the closed state.

As a result, when the opening/closing frame is in the open state (when the gaming machine is in the open state), the setting display section (first setting display section) indicates that a setting change has been made. When the opening/closing frame is in the closed state (when the gaming machine is in the closed state), the third setting display section indicates that the setting has been changed (the setting change is being executed). This makes it possible to confirm that the program is currently running. In addition, this allows settings changes to be monitored regardless of whether the frame of the gaming machine is open or closed, and to prevent settings changes from being made at a timing unintended by the player during a game as much as possible, thereby preventing unexpected disadvantages. This makes it possible to prevent this from occurring. This means that the display directions of the setting display section (first setting display section) and the third setting display section are different.

In addition, a symbol display section (main symbol display section) that displays a symbol (main symbol) indicating the result of the validity judgment (special symbol validity determination), and a production display section that displays game production (characters, production symbols). The effect display section may be used as a third setting display section. In addition, the display of the second setting display section and the symbol display section shall be controlled by the main control section (main control section), and the setting display section (also referred to as the "first setting display section") and the third setting display section (effect display section). The display may be controlled by a sub-control unit (sub-control unit).

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14, by providing a display section that allows the player to confirm information regarding setting changes, it is possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

1 Pachinko gaming machine, 7b production symbol display area (production symbol display section), 8 production symbol, 20 first starting opening, 21 second starting opening, 30 first grand prize opening, 35 second grand prize opening, 39 specific area , 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display section), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display section), 80 main control board (main control section), 90 sub control board (sub control ), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a first effect pending display, 103b second effect pending display.

Claims (1)

a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
special game execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a particular manner and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific result;
a determination probability storage means for storing a determination probability that the determination means determines a specific result;
A mode that has an insertion part into which a setting key can be inserted and removed, and in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion part and the setting key is operated to operate the insertion part between an OFF position and an ON position. A setting lock,
position determination means capable of determining whether the insertion portion is in the OFF position or the ON position;
a setting state in which a judgment probability can be set at least on condition that the insertion portion is operated to the ON position, and a judgment probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined judgment probability as a judgment probability of the judgment means in the setting state; ,
a power supply means for supplying power;
gaming information storage means for storing gaming information including a determination result by the determining means;
Setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means;
a first memory storage means capable of storing and retaining game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
a second memory storage means capable of storing and retaining the setting information stored in the setting probability storage means for a predetermined period even after the power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage;
gaming information recovery means capable of restoring gaming information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on gaming information stored and held by the first memory holding means when the power supplying means starts supplying power;
gaming information initialization means for erasing the gaming information stored and held by the first storage holding means when the power supplying means starts supplying power and not restoring the gaming information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; Equipped with
When the game information initialization means erases the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means, the game information initialization means can shift to the setting state,
When the game information recovery means restores the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means, it is impossible to shift to the setting state,
When the game information held by the first memory holding means is deleted and the setting state is not changed to the setting state , when the setting information held by the second memory holding means is predetermined normal information. , the game information stored and held by the first storage storage means is erased, and the game is started based on the determination probability of the determination means based on the setting information stored and held by the second storage storage means,
In the case where the game information held by the first memory holding means is deleted and the setting state is not changed to the setting state, if the setting information held by the second memory holding means is not predetermined normal information, making it impossible to start the game,
When the power supply means starts supplying power, if the setting key is placed in the OFF position with no setting information stored in the setting probability storage means, the game cannot be started. It is assumed that
a display screen that displays a setting notification to notify that the judgment probability of the judgment means has been set by the judgment probability setting means;
A movable decorative member that operates in accordance with the game production,
When power supply is started, an initial operation is performed to notify the setting and to confirm the operation of the movable decorative member,
After the setting notification is executed for a predetermined period of time, the initial operation of the movable decorative member is performed in such a manner that the movable decorative member passes through a position overlapping the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images